unitrans zxmp s200 (v2.20) installation & maintenance manual
Post on 27-Oct-2015
1.133 Views
Preview:
DESCRIPTION
TRANSCRIPT
ZXMP S200SDH Based Multi-Service Node Equipment
Installation & Maintenance Manual
Version 2.20
ZTE CORPORATION ZTE Plaza, Keji Road South, Hi-Tech Industrial Park, Nanshan District, Shenzhen, P. R. China 518057 Tel: (86) 755 26771900 800-9830-9830 Fax: (86) 755 26772236 URL: http://support.zte.com.cn E-mail: doc@zte.com.cn
LEGAL INFORMATION Copyright © 2007 ZTE CORPORATION. The contents of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties. Any reproduction or distribution of this document or any portion of this document, in any form by any means, without the prior written consent of ZTE CORPORATION is prohibited. Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by contractual confidentiality obligations. All company, brand and product names are trade or service marks, or registered trade or service marks, of ZTE CORPORATION or of their respective owners. This document is provided “as is”, and all express, implied, or statutory warranties, representations or conditions are disclaimed, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, title or non-infringement. ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable for damages resulting from the use of or reliance on the information contained herein. ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or applications covering the subject matter of this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license between ZTE CORPORATION and its licensee, the user of this document shall not acquire any license to the subject matter herein. ZTE CORPORATION reserves the right to upgrade or make technical change to this product without further notice. Users may visit ZTE technical support website http://ensupport.zte.com.cn to inquire related information. The ultimate right to interpret this product resides in ZTE CORPORATION.
Revision History
Date Revision No. Serial No. Reason for Revision
May.29, 2007 R1.0 sjzl20071229 First edition
ZTE CORPORATION Values Your Comments & Suggestions! Your opinion is of great value and will help us improve the quality of our product documentation and offer better services to our customers.
Please fax to: (86) 755-26772236; or mail to Documentation R&D Department, ZTE CORPORATION, ZTE Plaza, A Wing, Keji Road South, Hi-Tech Industrial Park, Shenzhen, P. R. China 518057.
Thank you for your cooperation!
Document Name
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) SDH Based Multi-Service Node Equipment Installation & Maintenance Manual
Product Version V2.20 Document Revision Number R1.0
Serial No. sjzl20071229 Equipment Installation Date
Presentation: (Introductions, Procedures, Illustrations, Completeness, Level of Detail, Organization, Appearance)
Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A
Accessibility: (Contents, Index, Headings, Numbering, Glossary)
Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A
Your evaluation of this documentation
Intelligibility: (Language, Vocabulary, Readability & Clarity, Technical Accuracy, Content)
Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A
Your suggestions for improvement of this documentation
Please check the suggestions which you feel can improve this documentation: Improve the overview/introduction Make it more concise/brief
Improve the Contents Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials
Improve the organization Add more troubleshooting information
Include more figures Make it less technical
Add more examples Add more/better quick reference aids
Add more detail Improve the index
Other suggestions
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
# Please feel free to write any comments on an attached sheet.
If you wish to be contacted regarding your comments, please complete the following:
Name Company
Postcode Address
Telephone E-mail
Contents
About this Manual............................................................. i
Purpose................................................................................ i Intended Audience ................................................................. i Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge .............................................. i What is in This Manual............................................................ i Related Documentation.......................................................... ii Conventions......................................................................... ii How to Get in Touch............................................................. iii
Chapter 1.......................................................................1
Equipment Installation ....................................................1
Safety Instructions ..........................................................2
Installation and Commissioning Flow..................................3
Installation Preparations ..................................................5
Preparation of Tools and Instruments.................................7 Preparing Tools and Instruments.............................................7 Preparing Equipment Software Kit ...........................................7
Collection of Technical Documents .....................................8
Inspection of Materials.....................................................8
Inspection of Installation Environment ...............................9
Inspection Upon Unpacking ............................................ 10 Unpacking Inspection of Cabinet ........................................... 11 Unpacking Inspection of Chassis ........................................... 13 Unpacking Inspection of Boards ............................................ 14 Unpacking Inspection of Accessories ...................................... 15 Unpacking Inspection of EMS Terminal ................................... 15 Counting and Checking the Goods ......................................... 15
Hardware Installation .................................................... 17 Determining Mounting Mode ................................................. 18 Mounting the Chassis on Desktop .......................................... 18
Mounting the Chassis on Wall................................................19 Mounting the Chassis in a 19-Inch Cabinet..............................21
Equipment Assembly ..................................................... 25 Plugging Board ...................................................................25 Unplugging Board................................................................26 Plugging the Fan/Power Modules ...........................................27 Unplugging the Fan/Power Modules........................................27 Installing the Dustproof Module .............................................28
Making and Sticking Labels............................................. 29 Label Making Requirements ..................................................29 Preparing Site Label.............................................................29 Preparing Subrack Bar Code Label .........................................31 Preparing Fiber Pigtail Label..................................................32 Preparing Cable Label ..........................................................34 Preparing Power Cable Label .................................................36 Preparing Cable Length Label ................................................38 Preparing Other Equipment Label...........................................38 Sticking Label .....................................................................39
Laying and Connecting Cables......................................... 40 External Cables...................................................................40 Connection Relation of External Cables ...................................43 General Requirements for Laying External Cables.....................45 External Cable Layout in Cabinet ...........................................49 Connecting Power Cable and Grounding Cable .........................53 Connecting E1 Cable............................................................59 Connecting T1 Cable............................................................65 Connecting Network Cable....................................................67 Connecting 75 Ω BITS Cable .................................................68 Connecting RS232 Cable (120 Ω BITS Cable) ..........................69 Connecting Alarm Output Cable.............................................70 Connecting Alarm Input Cable ...............................................71 Connecting E3/T3 Cable .......................................................72 Connecting FE Data Cable.....................................................72 Connecting V.35 Cable .........................................................73 Connecting AI Data Cable.....................................................75 Connecting OW Data Cable ...................................................77 Connecting SHDSL Cable ......................................................79 Connecting Fiber Pigtail ........................................................80 Connecting Orderwire Telephone Line.....................................83
EMS Computer Installation ............................................. 84
Hardware Installation Inspection ..................................... 85 Inspecting Cabinet and Chassis............................................. 85 Inspecting Cables ............................................................... 85 Inspecting Labels ................................................................ 86 Cleaning the Installation Site ................................................ 86
First Power-On Check .................................................... 87
First Power-On Check Flow ................................................... 87 Checking Installation and Configuration.................................. 88 Testing Primary Power Supply............................................... 89 Powering On ...................................................................... 89 Testing Fans ...................................................................... 90 Checking Equipment Status .................................................. 90
Chapter 2.....................................................................91
Equipment Maintenance................................................91
Basic Requirements for Running Requirements .................. 92
Overview ........................................................................... 92 Grounding and Lightning Protection Requirements ................... 92 Temperature/Humidity Requirements..................................... 96 Cleanness Requirements ...................................................... 96 Application Environment Requirements .................................. 97
Maintenance Tools and Instruments................................. 98 Maintenance Tools and Materials ........................................... 98 Instruments and Meters....................................................... 99
Equipment Room Maintenance Rules.............................. 101 Work Rules ...................................................................... 101 Shift Rules ....................................................................... 102
Maintenance Precautions.............................................. 103 Precautions for Equipment Maintenance ............................... 103 Precautions for EMS Precautions.......................................... 104
Maintenance Measures................................................. 106 Overview ......................................................................... 106 Plugging/Unplugging a Fiber Pigtail...................................... 106 Loopback Test .................................................................. 107 Optical Power Test ............................................................ 110 Bit Error Test ................................................................... 112
Inserting Alarm to Judge Switching Status ............................ 116 Setting Alarm Standby Mode............................................... 117 Protection Switching Configuration....................................... 117 APS Start/Stop/Reset Settings ............................................ 118 Setting Laser Status .......................................................... 119 Using a Multimeter to Test Service Cable .............................. 120 Resetting Boards............................................................... 120
Routine Equipment Maintenance Operations.................... 122 Checking Audio Alarm Function ........................................... 122 Observing Indicators of Boards............................................ 123 Checking the Fan Module.................................................... 128 Checking and Cleaning the Dustproof Module ........................ 129 Checking Ratproof Bag....................................................... 129 Checking Lightning Protection and Grounding ........................ 130
Routine EMS Maintenance Operations ............................ 131
Managing Users ................................................................ 132 Checking the Connection Between NE and EMS...................... 133 Monitoring Topology .......................................................... 134 Checking the Communication Status of Boards ...................... 135 Monitoring Alarm Messages ................................................ 135 Monitoring Performance Messages ....................................... 136 Querying System Configuration ........................................... 136 Managing NCP Database..................................................... 137 Querying NCP Security Log ................................................. 138 Printing Reports ................................................................ 139 Backing Up Data ............................................................... 139 Restoring Data.................................................................. 140
Troubleshooting Flow................................................... 141
Basic Principles of Troubleshooting ................................ 142
Basic Considerations for Fault Location........................... 143 Common Fault Causes ....................................................... 143 Principles for Fault Location ................................................ 144
Common Methods for Fault Location .............................. 145 Observation & Analysis Method ........................................... 145 Test Method ..................................................................... 145 Unplugging/Plugging Method............................................... 146 Replacement Method ......................................................... 146 Configuration Data Analysis Method ..................................... 147
Reconfiguration Method ..................................................... 147 Instrument Test Method..................................................... 148 Experience Method............................................................ 149
Classification of Alarm Messages ................................... 150
Classification of Performance Messages .......................... 153
Typical Troubleshooting ............................................... 155
Overview ......................................................................... 155 Communication Fault......................................................... 156 Service Interruption Fault .................................................. 157 Bit Error Fault................................................................... 162 Clock Synchronization Fault................................................ 166 EMS Connection Fault ........................................................ 168 Fan Fault ......................................................................... 171 Equipment Interconnection Fault ......................................... 171
Typical Performance Event and Handling ........................ 173
Physical Interface Performance Event................................... 173 RS Performance Event ....................................................... 175 MS Performance Event....................................................... 176 Higher-Order Path Performance Event.................................. 178 Lower-Order Path Performance Event................................... 179 Pointer Justification Performance Event ................................ 180
Appendix A................................................................183
Packing, Transportation & Storage .............................183
Packing ..................................................................... 183
Transportation ............................................................ 184
Storage ..................................................................... 184
Appendix B................................................................185
Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet .................185
Dimension and Structure.............................................. 185
Cabinet Components ................................................... 187
Cabinet Installation Flow .............................................. 188
Determining Installation Mode ...................................... 191
Preparing Installation Accessories.................................. 192
Determining Installation Position ................................... 194
Removing Cabinet Doors .............................................. 196 Overview ......................................................................... 196 Detaching Front Door......................................................... 197 Detaching Back Door ......................................................... 199
Installing and Fixing Cabinets ....................................... 201 Overview ......................................................................... 201 Bottom Fixing ................................................................... 201 Top Fixing ........................................................................ 213 Side-by-Side Fixing ........................................................... 215 Back-to-Back Fixing........................................................... 216
Installing Cabinet Doors............................................... 217 Overview ......................................................................... 217 Installing Front Door.......................................................... 218 Installing Back Door .......................................................... 221
Cabinet Installation Requirements ................................. 224
Appendix C................................................................225
SDH NE Address Definition and Route Configuration .225
Definition of NE IP Address........................................... 225
Overview ......................................................................... 225 FLSM Addressing............................................................... 226 VLSM Addressing............................................................... 228
Example of NE Addressing............................................ 230
Address/Route Configuration of EMS Host....................... 232
EMS Host Address Configuration.......................................... 232 Route Configuration........................................................... 233 Route Configuration Commands .......................................... 234
Appendix D ...............................................................237
Agent Program Upgrade..............................................237
Overview ................................................................... 237
DIP Switches on the SMB Board .................................... 238
Local Upgrade ............................................................ 239
Flow of Local Upgrade ........................................................ 239 Upgrade Preparations ........................................................ 240 Clearing the Database........................................................ 243
Downloading the Application/Logic Programs ........................ 243 Upgrading the Application/Logic Program ............................. 244 Verifying the Application/Logic Program ............................... 245 Downloading the Database ................................................. 247 Verifying the Version of Application/Logic Program in EMS ...... 247
Remote Upgrade ......................................................... 248
Flow of Remote Upgrade .................................................... 248 Upgrade Preparations ........................................................ 249 Downloading the Application/Logic Program.......................... 249 Upgrading the Application/Logic Program ............................. 250 Verifying the Upgraded Application/Logic Program ................. 251 Try Run of the Application/Logic Program ............................. 252 Verifying the Application/Logic Program After Trial Run........... 253 Activating the Application/Logic Program.............................. 254 Verifying the Activated Application/Logic Program.................. 255 Downloading the Database ................................................. 256 Verifying the Version of Application/Logic Program in EMS ...... 257
Precautions ................................................................ 258
Appendix E ................................................................261
Common Instruments and Meters ..............................261
PMS-1A Optic Power Meter ........................................... 261
ALL-11 Chip Burner ..................................................... 265
YGBERT-2M 2 M BER Tester.......................................... 269
SDH Tester ................................................................ 272
Appendix F.................................................................277
Abbreviations...............................................................277
Figures..........................................................................281
Tables...........................................................................285
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION i
About this Manual
Purpose
This manual provides the basic information you need for installing, configuring and maintaining the Unitrans ZXMP S200 (V2.20) SDH Based Multi-Service Node Equipment (ZXMP S200 for short).
Intended Audience
This document is intended for engineers and technicians who perform installation and maintenance activities on the ZXMP S200.
Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge
To use this document effectively, users should have a general understanding of SDH transmission system technology. Familiarity with the following is helpful:
ZXMP S200 equipment and its various components
ZXONM E300 Network Element Management System (EMS)
What is in This Manual
This Manual contains the following chapters and appendixes:
T AB L E 1 C H A P T E R AN D AP P E N D I X S U M M AR Y
Chapter/Appendix Summary
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Describes the installation procedure, preparation, assembling, chassis mounting, cable connections as well as the installation checkup and power on of the ZXMP S200.
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Introduces the routine maintenance and troubleshooting of the ZXMP S200.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
ii Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter/Appendix Summary
Appendix A Packing, Transportation & Storage
Introduces the packing, transportation and storage requirements of the ZXMP S200.
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Introduces the unified standard 19-inch cabinet for ZTE transmission equipment and describes the installation procedures of it.
Appendix C SDH NE Address Definition and Route Configuration
Introduces the configuration of NE address, IP address and route of the EMS host.
Appendix D Agent Program Upgrade
Introduces the definition of DIP switch, the download and upgrade of Agent programs of the ZXMP S200, including application and logic programs.
Appendix E Common Instruments and Meters
Briefly introduce some instruments or meters usually used.
Appendix F Abbreviations
Lists the abbreviations of technical terms you may encounter in this manual.
Related Documentation
The following documentation is related to this manual:
Unitrans ZXMP S200 (V2.20) SDH Based Multi-Service Node Equipment Product Descriptions
Conventions
ZTE documents employ the following typographical conventions.
T AB L E 2 TY P O G R AP H I C AL C O N V E N T I O N S
Typeface Meaning
Italics References to other Manuals and documents.
“Quotes” Links on screens.
Bold Menus, menu options, function names, input fields, radio button names, check boxes, drop-down lists, dialog box names, window names.
CAPS Keys on the keyboard and buttons on screens and company name.
Constant width Text that you type, program code, files and directory names, and function names.
[ ] Optional parameters.
Mandatory parameters.
Typographical Conventions
About this Manual
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION iii
Typeface Meaning
| Select one of the parameters that are delimited by it.
Note: Provides additional information about a certain topic.
Checkpoint: Indicates that a particular step needs to be checked before proceeding further.
Tip: Indicates a suggestion or hint to make things easier or more productive for the reader.
T AB L E 3 M O U S E OP E R AT I O N C O N V E N T I O N S
Typeface Meaning
Click Refers to clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) once.
Double-click Refers to quickly clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) twice.
Right-click Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button (usually the right mouse button) once.
Drag Refers to pressing and holding a mouse button and moving the mouse.
How to Get in Touch
The following sections provide information on how to obtain support for the documentation and the software.
If you have problems, questions, comments, or suggestions regarding your product, contact us by e-mail at support@zte.com.cn. You can also call our customer support center at (86) 755 26771900 and (86) 800-9830-9830.
ZTE welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this document. For further questions, comments, or suggestions on the documentation, you can contact us by e-mail at doc@zte.com.cn; or you can fax your comments and suggestions to (86) 755 26772236. You can also browse our website at http://support.zte.com.cn, which contains various interesting subjects like documentation, knowledge base, forum and service request.
Mouse Operation
Conventions
Customer Support
Documentation Support
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
iv Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
This page is intentionally blank.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 1
C h a p t e r 1
Equipment Installation
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Safety instructions
General installation and commissioning flow
Preparations before installing the ZXMP S200
Hardware installation of the ZXMP S200
Installation of the EMS host
Checkup after hardware installation
First power-on check
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
2 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Safety Instructions Only qualified personnel are entitled to install, operate, and maintain the ZXMP S200 equipment.
During the installation, operation and maintenance phases, all local safety rules and regulations must be strictly followed, to avoid any injury or damage. Safety precautions mentioned in this manual are used as add-on to local safety regulations.
The following safety signs are used to highlight the safety instructions in this manual which users should followed during the installation, operation and maintenance of the equipment.
T AB L E 4 S AF E T Y S I G N S
Safety Signs Meaning
Danger: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. This signal word should be limited to only extreme situations.
Warning: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Caution: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
Electric shock: There is a risk of electric shock.
Electrostatic: The device may be sensitive to static electricity.
Laser: Beware of strong laser beam.
ZTE CORPORATION is not responsible for any damage or unexpected results if general safety rules and regulations are violated during installation, operation or maintenance of equipment.
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 3
Installation and Commissioning Flow The installation and commissioning flow of the ZXMP S200 is shown in Figure 1.
F I G U R E 1 I N S T AL L AT I O N AN D C O M M I S S I O N I N G FL O W O F T H E ZXMP S200
The following briefly introduces the process involved in ZXMP S200 equipment installation and commissioning:
1. Project survey
The project survey includes the determination of networking mode, collection of equipment configuration and installation information, and the first acceptance test of environmental conditions.
Propose the requirements for the installation environmental conditions and advise the user to improve any point which is not consistent with the requirements.
Arrange and record the survey data carefully after the project survey.
Flowchart
Description
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
4 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
2. Engineering design
According to the Project Survey Report and ZTE’s Specifications for Equipment Installation Design as well as relevant industrial design specifications, design the equipment installation plan and work out a standard construction drawing for proper installation.
3. Equipment installation
This manual focuses on the equipment installation. It covers installation preparation, hardware installation, checkup and power-on test.
Installation preparation
The preparation before the hardware installation includes equipment and environment checkup.
Hardware Installation
The hardware installation includes board and chassis installation, equipment assembling, making labels, and cables installation.
Checkup and power-on
Power-on test is required for the equipment after the hardware installation is completed.
4. Software installation (EMS software)
The ZXONM E300 network element management system (EMS) software should be installed according to the instructions mentioned in related manuals. Usually the EMS software has been installed on the EMS computer before delivery, so the software installation on site is optional, depending on the user’s needs.
5. System debugging
It includes data configuration, single point debugging, integrated system debugging, and index test. This part will not be introduced in this manual.
Please refer to related engineering documents for detailed information.
6. Commissioning
The commissioning procedure starts from submission for acceptance to final acceptance. The equipment can be put into operation only after it has passed a series of acceptance tests and checks.
Please refer to related engineering documents for detailed information.
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 5
Installation Preparations The installation preparation flow is shown in Figure 2.
F I G U R E 2 I N S T AL L AT I O N P R E P AR AT I O N FL O W
Warning: Installation preparation flow is very important and must be strictly followed in order to ensure that everything is ready, including tools, technical documentations, and forms and tables. In addition, the installation environmental conditions should also be inspected before the installation.
Following describe the process involved in ZXMP S200 installation preparation:
Documents and tools preparation
Describes technical documents and tools required for ZXMP S200 equipment
Material inspection
Describes how to carry out material inspection process
Flowchart
Description
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
6 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Project pre-installation
Describes necessary steps required before ZXMP S200 equipment instillation
Note: Project pre-installation, including the installation of troughs, ladder and horizontal cabling rack, is usually completed by customers. No details about it are provided in this manual.
Installation environment inspection
Describes installation environment inspection requirements
Equipment inspection upon unpacking
Describes the equipment inspection requirements after unpacking the ZXMP S200 equipment
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 7
Preparation of Tools and Instruments Preparing Tools and Instruments
Prepare all tools, meters and instruments needed for the equipment installation with reference to the list given below.
Note: Meters and instruments should be properly calibrated and verified by the relevant authority of the government.
Large/small Phillips screwdriver, large flathead screwdriver, diagonal pliers, sharp nose pliers, adjustable spanner, vices, electric iron, solder wires, soft solder, insulating rubberized fabric, wallpaper cutter, electrical knife, marking pen, sharp-nose tweezers, tape, nylon adhesive hook-and-loop tape, dehydrated alcohol, dustproof paper, coaxial self-loop cable, fiber pigtails, antistatic wrist strap, wire stripper, wire crimpier, and dual in-line IC extractor
Test pencil, optical power meter, fixed optical attenuator, grounding resistance tester, and multimeter
Scaffold, long measuring tape, ruler, horizontal ruler, crowbar hammer, percussive drill, Ф16 drill bit, Ф6 drill bit, and spanner
Long screwdriver, which is delivered in the accessory package of the ZXMP S200 equipment
Preparing Equipment Software Kit
The equipment software kit refers to the software needed for the installation of the network management system, that is, EMS software CDs.
For more information on EMS software, please refer to related manuals of Unitrans ZXONM E300 EMS software.
Common Tools
Meters and Instruments
Construction Tools
Supplemental Tools
Contents
Reference
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
8 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Collection of Technical Documents Collect the following technical documents required to continue the procedures before equipment installation.
Project order contract (copy) and engineering design materials
Commissioning and engineering documents of the ZXMP S200
Product documentation:
Unitrans ZXMP S200 (V2.20) SDH Based Multi-Service Node Equipment Product Descriptions
Unitrans ZXMP S200 (V2.20) SDH Based Multi-Service Node Equipment Installation & Maintenance Manual
Manual suite of the ZXONM E300 EMS software.
Inspection of Materials To check the installation materials of the ZXMP S200 are correct as per specification.
Note: The equipment delivered by ZTE will be checked during unpacking inspection.
The following steps describe how to carry out material inspection:
1. Before installation, check whether the quantities and specifications of cables, troughs, cabling racks satisfy following requirements:
i. The specifications and quantities should meet the design requirements in the construction drawing.
ii. Quality certificate documents should be complete.
iii. The equipment external appearance is intact.
2. Make detailed inspection records and take immediate action if any material is found missing, dampened or damaged.
3. If any equipment materials need to be replaced with material of other specifications, report this to the designer and customer for approval.
END OF STEPS
Purpose
Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 9
Inspection of Installation Environment Two environment inspections are required before the installation of the ZXMP S200, one should be conducted during the project survey and the other should be conducted before the construction. In this section, the environment inspection before the construction is introduced.
To check the equipment room building, environment, power supply, grounding system and supporting facilities and make sure they meet the installation requirements.
The following briefly introduces how to carry out the installation environment inspection:
1. Check whether the equipment room construction and surrounding area in the building is complete with walls dry enough, doors and windows in good condition.
2. Check the environment of the equipment room and make sure the temperature, humidity and cleanliness in the equipment room satisfy the specifications mentioned in Unitrans ZXMP S200 (V2.20) SDH Based Multi-Service Node Equipment Product Descriptions.
3. Check the power supply in the equipment room and make sure the voltage range satisfies the requirement specified in Unitrans ZXMP S200 (V2.20) SDH Based Multi-Service Node Equipment Product Descriptions.
4. Check the grounding system in the equipment room and make sure the grounding resistance meets the requirements.
5. Check the supporting facilities in the equipment room, including cable distribution equipment, desk and table for maintenance terminals and printers, fire control devices and make sure they are available and satisfy the requirements.
6. Fill in corresponding acceptance reports after the inspection.
END OF STEPS.
Overview
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
10 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Inspection Upon Unpacking The ZXMP S200 equipment unpacking inspection includes:
Unpacking inspection of cabinet
Unpacking inspection of chassis
Unpacking inspection of board (optional)
Unpacking inspection of accessories
Unpacking inspection of EMS computer
Counting and checking the goods
Note: During the unpacking inspection, all concerned parties along with ZTE engineers should be present on site.
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 11
Unpacking Inspection of Cabinet
To unpack the ZXMP S200 cabinet and inspect it
1. Check if the goods are complete and meet the order requirements one by one according to the order/contract, waybill, and packing list.
Warning: Handle the goods with care and make sure not to damage the coating of the equipment and cabinet.
2. Place the wooden box horizontally. Figure 3 shows the outline of a packing box.
F I G U R E 3 W O O D E N P AC K I N G B O X O F A C AB I N E T
Top cover
Latch
Packing box
3. Lever the latches of the top cover with the crowbar hammer.
4. Lever the top cover through the gaps around it with the hammer to release the connecting iron sheets completely until remove the top cover off the box.
Warning: Be careful to prevent the hammer from touching the cabinet in the box so as to avoid damaging the cabinet.
5. Take the cabinet out of the box carefully. Figure 4 shows the packaging of the cabinet in the box.
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
12 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 4 P AC K AG I N G O F T H E C AB I N E T
Top cushion
Cushion
Cabinet (the front is up)
6. Remove all the wrappings such as cushions and plastic bags from the cabinet, then place the cabinet upright.
Note:
If adjustment feet are needed for installation, place the cabinet upright directly. If the cabinet cannot stand stable, adjust the height of the four adjustment feet at the cabinet bottom.
If adjustment feet are not needed for installation, remove four adjustment feet first, and then place the cabinet upright.
Three persons are required to move the cabinet.
7. Check whether cabinet includes subrack, power alarm subrack, and alarm indicator board, all of which have been assembled.
8. Make sure that no accessory of the cabinet and subrack is missing, equipment appearance is clean, components inside are clean without scratches, screws are tightened, plug-ins are reliably connected and labels are clear.
Warning: If the equipment is moved from a place of lower temperature and lower humidity to a place of higher temperature and humidity, wait at least 30 minutes before unpacking to avoid any damage to the equipment due to any dew condensing on the surface of the equipment and boards.
END OF STEPS.
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 13
Unpacking Inspection of Chassis
To unpack the ZXMP S200 chassis for inspection if the chassis is delivered separately
Note: If the ZXMP S200 chassis is delivered separately, it is packed in a carton, as shown in Figure 5.
F I G U R E 5 P AC K I N G C AR T O N O F T H E ZXMP S200
1. Cut the tape on the packing carton with a wallpaper knife and then open the carton.
2. Take the ZXMP S200 chassis out of the carton with care and remove the cushions and plastic bag, as shown in Figure 6.
F I G U R E 6 RE M O V I N G T H E PAC K I N G M AT E R I AL S
ZXMP S200 chassis
Cushions
3. Check and make sure that the chassis is clear without scratch. Ensure that the inside of the chassis is free from smear, plug-in parts are in proper and secure contact, and the labels are clear.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
14 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Unpacking Inspection of Boards
To unpack ZXMP S200 boards for inspection if the boards are delivered separately.
Note: If the ZXMP S200 boards are delivered separately, each board is packed in a carton and all cartons are placed in a wooden packing box.
1. Open the wooden packing box of the boards.
2. Take the cartons out of the wooden box. Count the boards.
3. Open the board cartons. Each board is protected by a special static-shielding bag and antistatic sponge cushions, as shown in Figure 7.
F I G U R E 7 P AC K I N G O F B O AR D S
Top cushion
Board
Bottom cushion
Carton
4. Remove the antistatic sponge cushions and take the board out of the static-shielding bag.
5. Check the name and label of each board and make sure they are consistent with those marked on corresponding carton.
Caution: If the packing box is moved from a place of lower temperature and lower humidity to a place of higher temperature and higher humidity, wait at least 30 minutes before unpacking to avoid any damage to the equipment due to any dew condensing on the surface of the equipment and boards.
Important! Be sure to take antistatic measures when taking the board out of antistatic bag.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 15
Unpacking Inspection of Accessories
To unpack the accessories of the ZXMP S200 for inspection
1. Rip the tape on the universal box of the accessories with a knife and open the box.
2. Take out the foam plates stuffed among the interspaces.
3. Take out the accessories from their plastic bags.
4. Check the specifications and numbers of accessories such as cable ties, cables, instruction books, and fastening components.
END OF STEPS.
Unpacking Inspection of EMS Terminal
To unpack the EMS terminal for inspection
1. Rip the tape on the packing carton of the EMS terminal with a knife and open the carton.
2. Check that the computer, monitor, keyboard and EMS software CDs are complete.
END OF STEPS.
Counting and Checking the Goods
To check ZXMP S200 goods are correct after unpacking
1. After unpacking, check the equipment goods according to the order contract and Packing (Inspection) List in order to confirm that the equipment goods meet the requirements as specified in the order. Make sure no accessory is missing.
2. Check whether the ZXMP S200 chassis and boards have no mechanical damage. Make sure the cable connections are satisfactory.
3. Make sure that the specifications and numbers of the accessories are correct, and the EMS terminal configuration is complete.
4. If anything is found missing or damaged, fill out Application Form for Makeup Delivery as per the actual case.
Purpose
Steps
Purpose
Steps
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
16 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
5. Fill the inspection report according to unpacking inspection and note down the record, which should be signed and confirmed by both parties who participated in the unpacking inspection.
6. Feed back related equipment inspection documents to ZTE CORPORATION in time.
END OF STEPS.
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 17
Hardware Installation Figure 8 shows the installation flow of ZXMP S200 hardware.
F I G U R E 8 H AR D W AR E I N S T AL L AT I O N FL O W O F T H E ZXMP S200
Equipment Installation Acceptance Record
Reworking for rectification
Installation acceptance
Pass
Fail
Mounting chassis
Preparing and attaching labels
Laying external cables
Installing EMS computer (if required)
Self-test
Determining mounting mode
Laying fiber pigtails
Preparing accessories
Assembling the equipment(if required)
Start
End
Connecting power cables and grounding wires
Note: The hardware installation is critical and basic in the whole installation process. It is recommended to follow the hardware installation flow. Keep safety issues in mind and be cautious during the installation.
Flowchart
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
18 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Determining Mounting Mode
Determine the mounting mode according to the actual site conditions, design requirements and user’s requirements.
The ZXMP S200 can be mounted on desktop, on wall or in a 19-inch cabinet.
The cabinet mounted mode is applicable to cases where the ZXMP S200 is connected to other equipment for mixed networking or multiple transmission equipments are used together. When installed in a standard 19-inch cabinet, the ZXMP S200 chassis can be fixed with front or rear mounting lugs.
Mounting the Chassis on Desktop
To mount the ZXMP S200 chassis on the desktop
1. Check and make sure that the chassis is intact, all feet on the bottom are complete and on the same height.
2. Place the chassis on the fireproof desktop in the equipment room. Fix the chassis according to the site conditions.
Note: For easier layout and connection of cables and subsequent construction, the equipment can also be first placed at another place, and then moved to the desktop after the cables are arranged and connected properly.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 19
Mounting the Chassis on Wall
To mount the ZXMP S200 chassis on wall in the equipment room
Table 5 lists the accessories needed during mounting the chassis on wall.
T AB L E 5 AC C E S S O R I E S N E E D E D F O R W AL L -M O U N T E D M O D E
Accessory Specification Unit Number Remark
Steel expansion bolt
M10×80 Set 4 Including flat washer, spring washer and nut
Fastening screw
M5×12 Set 4 Including washer
IEC lug for front fixing
- Pair 1 As shown in Figure 14
Wall-mounted bracket
As specified in Figure 9
Set 1 -
Figure 9 shows the bracket for wall-mounted mode.
F I G U R E 9 W AL L -M O U N T E D B R AC K E T
430mm
460mm
490mm
358m
m222m
m
120m
m
Purpose
Accessories
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
20 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
1. Check and make sure that the chassis and bracket is intact.
Note: If you want to use another bracket instead of the special bracket provided by ZTE CORPORATION, ensure its bearing strength and size satisfy the requirements of the equipment.
2. Drill four holes (diameter: Φ16 mm) 60 mm depth with a percussive drill on the wall where the equipment is to be mounted, as shown in Figure 10.
F I G U R E 10 LO C AT I O N O F MO U N T I N G HOL E S O N T H E W AL L
460mm
120m
m
3. Clear dusts in the holes and then insert four steel expansion screws (M10×80) into the holes one by one.
4. Align four mounting holes on the bracket with the four expansion screws and push the bracket to the wall with the expansion screws inserted into the mounting holes.
5. Put on the flat washer, spring washer and nut (M10) in turn and then screw down the nut for each expansion bolt, as shown in Figure 11.
F I G U R E 11 MO U N T I N G T H E B R AC K E T O N W AL L
Bracket Nut
Washer
Expansion screw
Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 21
6. Place the ZXMP S200 chassis on the bracket, and fix the lugs on the front of the chassis to the bracket with fastening screws (M5×12), as shown in Figure 12.
F I G U R E 12 F I X I N G T H E C H AS S I S O N T H E B R AC K E T
Lug
Note: For easier layout and connection of cables and subsequent construction, the chassis can also be first placed at another place, and then mounted on the bracket after the cables are arranged and connected properly.
END OF STEPS.
Mounting the Chassis in a 19-Inch Cabinet
To mount the ZXMP S200 chassis in a standard 19-inch cabinet
The ZXMP S200 chassis can be fixed in the 19-inch cabinet with front fixing lugs or rear fixing lugs.
If the front fixing mode is selected, make sure the 19-inch cabinet meets the following requirements:
The cabinet’s width should be 600 mm and its depth over 300 mm.
The distance between the vertical shaft and the front door of the cabinet should be larger than 60 mm.
The rear fixing mode is mostly used when other ZTE transmission equipment are used with the ZXMP S200 together in the network. That means the ZXMP S200 and other transmission equipment are mounted in the same cabinet.
Purpose
Fixing Modes
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
22 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The following introduces the lugs for front fixing and rear fixing.
Lugs for front fixing of the chassis
Two types of front fixing lugs are available: ETSI lug and IEC lug, which complies ETSI and IEC standard respectively.
Figure 13 shows a ZXMP S200 chassis installed with two ETSI lugs on the front.
F I G U R E 13 ZXMP S200 C H AS S I S W I T H ETSI LU G S
ETSI lug
Figure 14 shows a ZXMP S200 chassis installed with two IEC lugs.
F I G U R E 14 ZXMP S200 C H AS S I S W I T H IEC LU G S
IEC lug
Lug for rear fixing of the chassis
Figure 15 shows a ZXMP S200 chassis installed with lugs for rear fixing.
F I G U R E 15 ZXMP S200 C H AS S I S W I T H LU G S F O R R E AR F I X I N G
Lug
Accessories
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 23
Besides the lugs needed in the in-cabinet mounting, related accessories of the cabinet should also be prepared according to the type and structure of the cabinet before the installation, such as bolts and bracket for the fixing of the ZXMP S200 chassis.
For the unified cabinet for ZTE transmission equipment (ZTE cabinet for short), Appendix B in this manual gives the information of all necessary accessories needed in the in-cabinet installation of the ZXMP S200 chassis.
The following only introduces the installation procedures of the ZXMP S200 chassis in a ZTE 19-inch cabinet. You can refer to them while installing the chassis in other standard 19-inch cabinet.
Note: For the installation procedures of the ZTE cabinet, please refer to Appendix B in this manual.
1. Prepare before the installation
i. Check and make sure that the chassis is intact and not deformed.
ii. Determine the installation position of ZXMP S200 chassis in the cabinet for the purpose of easy operation, good ventilation and heat dissipation.
Note:
Reserve a space of 1U (44.5 mm) high above the ZXMP S200 chassis while determining the installation position.
If multiple chassis are to be mounted in the same cabinet, be sure to keep 1U space between chassis.
It is recommended to install chassis one by one from bottom to top in case of installing multiple chassis for the purpose of detaching and cleaning air filter and the convenience during cable layout.
iii. Install lugs for rear fixing mode, as shown in Figure 15.
iv. Install the bracket used to support the chassis properly at the determined position in the cabinet.
2. Install the ZXMP S200 chassis
i. Place the ZXMP S200 chassis on the bracket and push it horizontally and smoothly into the cabinet, as shown in Figure 16.
If there is any resistance, check if the cabinet or the chassis is deformed. Do not push it by force to avoid damage.
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
24 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 16 PU S H I N G T H E ZXMP S200 C H AS S I S I N T O ZTE C AB I N E T
Captive screw
Chassis
ii. Fix the chassis to the cabinet with the captive screws on the lugs. For example, Figure 17 shows the cabinet in which two ZXMP S200 chassis are mounted.
F I G U R E 17 TW O ZXMP S200 C H AS S I S M O U N T E D I N ZTE C AB I N E T
END OF STEPS.
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 25
Equipment Assembly The ZXMP S200 equipment assembly includes:
Installation of boards
Installation of fan/power module
Installation of dustproof module.
Note: Generally, the boards and modules have been installed in the ZXMP S200 chassis before delivery. The installation procedures introduced here are only for your reference during maintenance.
Plugging Board
The main board and plug-in board are installed in the chassis horizontally. Since their installation procedures are similar, the following only introduces how to plug/unplug the main board.
Caution:
Avoid unplugging the main board after the commissioning of the ZXMP S200 because the unplugging operation will cause traffic interruption.
Do not unplug or plug any board when the power is on.
To plug the main board into the chassis
1. Take the main board out of the antistatic bag and check if there is any mechanical damage.
Note: Since there are many CMOS devices on the board, reliable antistatic measures are necessary before taking the board with hands, such as wearing an antistatic wrist strap.
Caution: For a ZXMP S200 chassis installed in a cabinet, do not use the antistatic wrist strap socket on the chassis to connect the antistatic wrist strap. Connect the antistatic wrist strap to corresponding socket on the cabinet instead.
2. Loose the ejector levers on the front panel of the board. Hold the left and right ejector levers with both hands and then push in the board along the guide rail carefully, as shown in Figure 18.
Note: Keep the board horizontal and apply appropriate force throughout the pushing process.
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
26 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 18 PU S H I N G T H E MAI N B O AR D I N T O T H E C H AS S I S
Captivescrew
Ejectorlever
3. Push in the board until the bayonets are blocked by the slot edge. Press the left/right ejector levers with proper force to the right and left respectively, inserting the connectors of the board into corresponding sockets on the backplane.
4. Check and make sure that the board panel is at the same level with outer frame of the chassis.
5. Screw the captive screws clockwise to secure the board.
END OF STEPS.
Unplugging Board
To unplug the main board from the chassis
1. Unscrew the captive screws on the front panel of the chassis anticlockwise.
2. Hold the left and right ejector levers with both hands and then turn the left one to left, the right one to right to loose the board.
3. Catch hold of an ejector lever with thumb and forefinger of one hand, hold the board with the other hand, then pull out the board smoothly. The unplugging direction is as shown in Figure 19.
F I G U R E 19 UN P L U G G I N G T H E M AI N B O A R D FR O M T H E C H AS S I S
Captive screwEjector lever
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 27
Plugging the Fan/Power Modules
To plug the fan module and the power module
Be sure to turn the power switch to “O” before pulling in the power module.
1. Push the fan module in the chassis horizontally, inserting the connector of the fan module into corresponding socket on the backplane.
2. Push the power module in the chassis horizontally until the front panel of the module is at the same level as the front frame of the chassis, with the connectors of the power module inserted into corresponding sockets on the backplane of the chassis.
3. Turn the rotary switch on the front panel of the power module anticlockwise to “LOCK”. Then the fan module and the power module are secured.
END OF STEPS.
Unplugging the Fan/Power Modules
To unplug the fan module and the power module
Be sure to turn the power switch to “O” before pulling out the power module.
1. Turn the rotary switch on the front panel of the power module clockwise to “UNLOCK”.
2. Pull out the fan module and the power module horizontally.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Prerequisite
Steps
Purpose
Prerequisite
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
28 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Installing the Dustproof Module
To install the dustproof module
1. Screw off the screws on the right side of the chassis.
2. Put on the dustproof module and align its mounting holes with those on the chassis, as shown in Figure 20.
F I G U R E 20 I N S T AL L I N G T H E D U S T P R O O F M O D U L E
Mounting holeon chassis
DustproofmoduleMounting
hole
3. Fix the dustproof by fastening the screws.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 29
Making and Sticking Labels Label Making Requirements
For clear connection relations between cables or fiber pigtails, and for the convenience of the equipment debugging and maintenance, labels are necessary for the equipment, connection cables, and cable distribution frames. The requirements for making labels are as follow:
All labels should be printed, and no handwritten is allowed.
The special ZTE labels should be printed using printing templates corresponding to specific label types.
Font size of site names should be 14, and that of the remaining label content should be 9.
All text should be in bold, and centered horizontally and vertically. The font size can be reduced if there are too many words.
Preparing Site Label
To prepare and stick ZXMP S200 equipment site label
1. Use the special sticker supplied by ZTE CORPORATION. The sticker surface is made of mute silver foil. The format of the sticker is as shown in Figure 21.
F I G U R E 21 FO R M AT O F T H E S I T E L AB E L
18 m
m
42 mm
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
30 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
2. Print local site name, contract number, and user name on the site label. The format of contract number is “XYZ”.
Table 6 describes the meaning of “XYZ”.
T AB L E 6 FO R M AT O F C O N T R AC T N U M B E R I N T H E S I T E LAB E L
Contract Number
Meaning Definition
X: System name (letter)
WM: DWDM equipment
SM: SDH equipment
PW: Power supply equipment.
Y: Equipment model (letter)
G: ZXMP S390
J: ZXMP S380
B: ZXMP S360
I: ZXMP S385
V: ZXMP S330
W: ZXMP S325
H: ZXMP S320 (600V2)
E: ZXMP S320 (150V2)
T: ZXMP S100
Z: ZXMP S200
XYZ
Z: System number (numeral)
Contract serial number
Example: The site label of ZXMP S200 equipment at Beijing office made by XX Telecom Company is as shown in Figure 22.
F I G U R E 22 S I T E L AB E L E X A M P L E
Beijing OfficeSMZxxxxxxxxxx-xxxXX Telecom Company
x: numeral, representing for contract serial number
X: letter, representing for company name
3. Stick the label on the upper left corner of cabinet front door.
END OF STEPS.
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 31
Preparing Subrack Bar Code Label
To prepare and stick ZXMP S200 equipment subrack bar code label
1. Use the sticker supplied by ZTE CORPORATION for the subrack bar code label, whose format is shown in Figure 23.
F I G U R E 23 FO R M AT O F S U B R AC K B AR C O D E L AB E L
18 m
m
42 mm
2. Print the local site name, barcode, and ZTE serial number on the sticker.
3. Stick the subrack bar code label on the ZXMP S200 chassis.
The subrack bar code label is used along with the site label, that is, there are both site label and subrack bar code label on the ZXMP S200 chassis. The sticking position of these two labels on ZXMP S200 equipment is as shown in Figure 24.
F I G U R E 24 ST I C K I N G P O S I T I O N O F S U B R AC K B AR C O D E L AB E L
Site label Subrack barcode label
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
32 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Preparing Fiber Pigtail Label
To prepare and stick fiber pigtail labels for the ZXMP S200
1. Prepare the special stickers provided by ZTE CORPORATION. Figure 25 shows the format of fiber pigtail label.
F I G U R E 25 FO R M AT O F F I B E R P I G T AI L LAB E L
80 mm
20 m
m
2. Print OPTICAL (fr:) and local interface No. on the left of the label, and print OPTICAL (to:) and opposite-end interface No. on the right of the label.
Note:
The interface numbering requirements at equipment side are listed in Table 7.
The interface numbering requirements at ODF side are listed in Table 8.
T AB L E 7 F I B E R P I G T AI L I N T E R F AC E N U M B E R I N G FO R M AT AT E Q U I P M E N T S I D E
Number Meaning Definition Example
X: System name
(letter)
The system name should be the same as that in site label.
A: Equipment No.
(numeral)
The number of each equipment in the same site must be unique.
SM01
B: Subrack No.
(numeral)
The number increases progressively from top to bottom. It is “1” for standalone equipment or if there is only one subrack in the cabinet.
1
XA-B-C-D
C: Slot No.:
(numeral)
Same as slot number definition of the equipment
-
Purpose
Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 33
Number Meaning Definition Example
D: Port No.
(numeral and letter)
The optical interfaces are numbered in ascending order from left to right and from top to bottom. Receiving and sending are defined uniformly by letter:
T: out (2T for out2)
R: in (2R for in2)
For ZXMP S200 with four optical interfaces, the port No. are arranged as:
1T, 1R, 2T, 2R, 3T, 3R, 4T, 4R
T AB L E 8 F I B E R P I G T AI L S I N T E R F AC E N U M B E R I N G FO R M AT AT ODF S I D E
Number Meaning Definition Example
X: System name
X ODF
A: System No.
A: ODF number
ODF03
B: Module number of the unit
Number of the ODF unit module where the interface is located
3
C: Row number or column number
Row number followed by “R” (ROW), or
Column number followed by “L” (LINE)
2R (or 2L) XA-B-C-D
D: Port No.
Optical interface number followed by “R” or “T”, which indicates an optical receive interface or an optical transmit interface
7R
Example: Figure 26 shows the label content of a fiber pigtail connecting “optical transmit interface, slot 07, subrack 1, SM01 cabinet” to “optical interface 7, column 3, module 3#, ODF 3#”.
F I G U R E 26 F I B E R P I G T AI L L AB E L E X AM P L E
O P T IC A L (to :)O D F 0 3 -3 -3 L -7 R
O P T IC A L (fr :)S M 0 1 -1 -0 7 -T
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
34 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
3. Stick the label on the position 1 cm to 2 cm away from the fiber pigtail connector, as shown in Figure 27.
F I G U R E 27 ST I C K I N G P O S I T I O N O F F I B E R P I G T AI L L A B E L
1cm - 2cm
END OF STEPS.
Preparing Cable Label
To prepare and stick labels for cables used to connect the ZXMP S200
1. Prepare the special stickers provided by ZTE CORPORATION. Figure 28 shows the format of cable label.
F I G U R E 28 FO R M AT O F C A B L E L AB E L
80 mm
20 m
m
2. Print TYPE (fr:) and local interface No. on the left of the label, and print TYPE (to:) and opposite-end interface No. on the right of the label. Here, “TYPE” refers to the data type, such as “2 M”, “34 M” and “RS232”.
Note:
The interface number at equipment side should meet the requirements listed in Table 9.
The interface number at DDF side should meet the requirements listed in Table 10.
Purpose
Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 35
T AB L E 9 C AB L E I N T E R F AC E N U M B E R I N G FO R M AT AT E Q U I P M E N T S I D E
Number Meaning Definition Example
X: System name
(letter)
The system name should be the same as that in site label, as introduced in Table 6.
A: Equipment No.
(numeral)
The number of each equipment in the same site must be unique.
SM01
B: Subrack No.
(numeral)
The number increases progressively from top to bottom. It is “1” for standalone equipment or if there is only one subrack in the cabinet.
1
C: Slot No.:
(numeral)
Same as slot number definition of the equipment
- XA-B-C-D
D: Port No.
(numeral and letter)
Use the defined port numbers. For the undefined ones, the ports are numbered in ascending order from left to right and from top to bottom. Transmitting and receiving are defined uniformly by letters:
T: out (2T for out2)
R: in (2R for in2)
For ZXMP S200 with 21 E1 interfaces, the port No. are arranged as: 1R, 1T, 2R, 2T… 21R, 21T
(Refer to the identifiers on the panel of main board while making the labels.)
T AB L E 10 C AB L E I N T E R F AC E N U M B E R I N G FO R M AT AT DDF S I D E
Number Meaning Definition Example
X: System name
X: DDF
A: System No.
A: DDF number
DDF03
B: Module number of the unit
Number of the DDF unit module where the interface is located
3
C: Row number or column number
Row number followed by “R” (ROW), or
Column number followed by “L” (LINE)
2R (or 2L)
XA-B-C-D
D: Port No.
Optical interface number followed by “R” or “T”, which indicates an optical receive interface or an optical transmit interface
7R
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
36 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Example: Figure 29 shows the label of a 155 M cable at the ZTE equipment side connecting “Port 3, Slot 02, Subrack 1#, Cabinet SM01” to “Port 7, Column 2, Module 3#, DDF03”.
F I G U R E 29 EX AM P L E O F C AB L E L AB E L
155M(to:)DDF03-3-2L-7T
155M(fr:)SM01-1-02-03R
3. Stick the label on the position 1 cm to 2 cm away from the cable connector, as shown in Figure 32.
F I G U R E 30 ST I C K I N G P O S I T I O N O F C AB L E L AB E L
END OF STEPS.
Preparing Power Cable Label
To prepare and stick label for the power cable
1. Prepare the special stickers provided by ZTE CORPORATION. Figure 31 shows the format of power cable label.
F I G U R E 31 FO R M AT O F P O W E R C AB L E L AB E L
80 mm
20 m
m
2. Print POWER (fr:) followed by the local power port No. on the left of the label, and print POWER (to:) followed by the opposite power port No. on the right of the label.
Note:
The port number format at ZTE equipment side is shown in Table 11.
Purpose
Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 37
The port number format at user equipment side is shown in Table 12.
T AB L E 11 P O W E R P O R T N U M B E R I N G FO R M AT AT ZTE E Q U I P M E N T S I D E
Number Meaning Example
X: System name
A: Equipment No. SM01
B: Type of power cable PGND, -48 V, GND XA-B-D
D: Port No. I, II
T AB L E 12 P O W E R I N T E R F AC E N U M B E R I N G FO R M AT AT U S E R E Q U I P M E N T S I D E
Number Meaning Example
X: System name
A: Equipment No. PW03
B: Type of power cable PGND, -48 V, GND
C: Row number or column number
2R, 2L
XA-B-C-D
D: Port No. 15
Example: Figure 32 shows the label at ZTE equipment side for a –48 V power cable from “Port I, Cabinet SM01” to “Port 15, Column 2, User Side PW03 Cabinet”.
F I G U R E 32 PO W E R C AB L E L AB E L E X AM P L E
POWER(to:)PW03- -48V-2L-15
POWER(fr:)SM01- -48V-I
3. Stick the label on the position 1 cm to 2 cm away from the power cable connector, as shown in Figure 33.
F I G U R E 33 ST I C K I N G P O S I T I O N O F P O W E R C AB L E L AB E L
END OF STEPS.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
38 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Preparing Cable Length Label
To prepare and stick the cable length label for different types of cables used in ZXMP S200 equipment
1. Prepare special stickers provided by ZTE CORPORATION. Figure 34 shows the format of cable length label.
F I G U R E 34 CAB L E LE N G T H L AB E L FO R M AT
10mm
6mm
2. Print the cable length on the label.
Example: shows the cable length label for a cable with the length of 15 m.
F I G U R E 35 CAB L E LE N G T H L AB E L E X AM P L E
15m
3. Stick the cable length cable on a visible and firm position of the cable.
END OF STEPS.
Preparing Other Equipment Label
To prepare and stick labels for other equipment connected to the ZXMP S200 equipment
1. Prepare and stick ODF labels
i. Prepare ODF label according to the specific format and dimension of the ODF ID plate.
ii. Print the ODF equipment number, module number, all port numbers, equipment number of the opposite office, corresponding local equipment number, subrack number, optical board slot number, port number, and transmitting/receiving relation on the label.
iii. Stick the label at some visible place firmly.
Purpose
Steps
Purpose
Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 39
2. Prepare and stick DDF labels
i. Prepare DDF label according to the specific format and size of the ODF ID plate.
ii. The DDF label content should include: DDF equipment number, module number, all port numbers, equipment number of the opposite office, corresponding local equipment number, subrack number, board slot number, port number and transmitting/receiving relation.
iii. Stick the label at some visible place firmly.
END OF STEPS.
Sticking Label
To stick label to a cable correctly and firmly
Before sticking a label, clean the position to make sure that there is no dust or other objects.
1. Place the cable flat in the middle of the sticky surface of the label;
2. Fold up the label with the two sides aligning to each other, so that no distinct white border comes out on either surface of the folded sticker.
3. After sticking, fold the label root where two sticking surfaces stick together leftward and rightward, or press tight at the root to prevent it from opening.
Caution: During sticking, do not touch the sticky surface of the label to ensure firm attachment.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Prerequisite
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
40 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Laying and Connecting Cables External Cables
The external cables of ZXMP S200 include:
Power cable
-48 V/-60 V DC power cable
+24 V DC power cable
AC power cable
Protection grounding cable
Network cable
Straight-through network cable
Crossover network cable
Service cable
75 Ω E1 cable
120 Ω E1 cable
T1 cable
E3/T3 cable
V.35 cable
BITS cable
75 Ω BITS cable
RS232 cable (120 Ω BITS cable)
Data cable
FE data cable
AI data cable
OW data cable
SHDSL cable
Alarm cable
Alarm output cable
Alarm input cable
Orderwire telephone line
Fiber pigtail
Types
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 41
Note: The functional modules in the ZXMP S200 are connected with each other through the backplane instead of cable connection, so as to guarantee the reliable connection and facilitate the operations of boards plugging/unplugging.
Table 13 lists the specifications and connectors of the external cables.
T AB L E 13 S P E C I F I C AT I O N S O F E X T E R N AL C AB L E S
Connector No.
External Cable
Specification End A End B
1
-48 V/-60 V DC power/ grounding cable
Multi-strand conductors in blue and black coat
3-pin D-type straight solder plug
To be made on site
2
+24 V DC power/ grounding cable
Multi-strand conductors in red and black coat
3-pin D-type straight solder plug
To be made on site
3 AC power cable
0.75 mm2 conductor
Standard AC power plug
To be made on site
4 Protection grounding cable
2.5 mm2 multi-strand conductor in yellow-green coat
RV3-4 lug To be made on site
5
Straight-through network cable
FTP super category-5 shielded data cable
RJ45 plug RJ45 plug
6 Crossover network cable
FTP super category-5 shielded data cable
RJ45 plug RJ45 plug
7 75 Ω E1 cable
8-core 75 Ω micro coaxial cable
50-pin D-type lateral injection molding plug
To be made on site
8 120 Ω E1 cable
16-core 120 Ω trunk cable
50-pin D-type lateral injection molding plug
To be made on site
9 T1 cable 32-core cable
50-pin D-type lateral injection molding plug
To be made on site
Specifications
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
42 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Connector No.
External Cable
Specification End A End B
10 E3/T3 cable 75 Ω single-strand coaxial cable
1.0/2.3 straight crimp plug (male)
To be made on site
11 V.35 cable 26-core single-strand round cable
26-pin D-type flat cable IDC crimp plug (blade pin)
V.35 plug
12 75 Ω BITS cable
75 Ω single-strand coaxial cable
1.0/2.3 straight crimp plug (male)
To be made on site
13
RS232 cable (120 Ω BITS cable)
8-core 120 Ω cable RJ45 plug RJ45 plug
14 FE data cable
FTP super category-5 shielded data cable
RJ45 plug RJ45 plug
15 AI data cable
26-core single-strand round cable
26-pin D-type flat cable IDC crimp plug (blade pin)
To be made on site
16 OW data cable
Switch digital cable
26-pin D-type flat cable IDC crimp plug (blade pin)
To be made on site
17 SHDSL cable
2-core telephone line
RJ45 plug RJ11 plug
18 Alarm output cable
Level twisted pair cable (digital)
RJ11 plug RJ11 plug
19 Alarm input cable
FTP super category-5 shielded data cable
RJ45 plug RJ45 plug
20 Orderwire telephone line
Telephone line RJ11 plug RJ11 plug
21 Fiber pigtail Single-mode fiber cable
LC/PC optical connector
Determined according to user’s requirements
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 43
Note: The equipment side connectors of most external cables have already been made before delivery, while the user side connectors depend on actual user equipment. Therefore, it is usually necessary to make the user side connectors of external cables and connect them on site.
Connection Relation of External Cables
Table 14 lists the connection relation of external cables.
T AB L E 14 C O N N E C T I O N R E L AT I O N S O F EX T E R N AL C AB L E S
No. External Cable
End A End B
1 -48 V/-60 V DC power cable
DC power socket on PWA board
Power distribution unit in cabinet or user power supply equipment
2 +24 V DC power cable
DC power socket on PWB board
Power distribution unit in cabinet or user power supply equipment
3 AC power cable
AC power socket on PWC board
Power distribution unit in cabinet or user power supply equipment
4 Protection grounding wire
Grounding terminal in the chassis
Cabinet or grounding busbar in equipment room
5
Straight-through network cable
Qx interface (RJ45 socket) on main board HUB
6 Crossover network cable
Qx interface (RJ45 socket) on main board
EMS computer
7 75 Ω BITS cable
Tx/Rx interface on main board
User equipment
8 RS232 cable (120 Ω BITS cable)
232 interface (RJ45 socket) on main board
User equipment
9 Alarm output cable
OUT interface (RJ45 socket) on main board
Power distribution unit in cabinet
10 Alarm input cable
IN interface (RJ45 socket) on main board
User equipment
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
44 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
No. External Cable
End A End B
11 FE data cable
FE interface on main board or Ethernet interface board
User equipment
12 75 Ω E1 cable
E1 interface on main board or ET1 board
User equipment
13 120 Ω E1 cable
E1 interface on main board or ET1 board
User equipment
14 T1 cable T1 interface on main board or ET1 board
User equipment
15 E3/T3 cable E3/T3 interface on EIE3 board
User equipment
16 V.35 cable V.35 interface on V35B board
User equipment
17 AI data cable
Audio interface on AI board
User equipment
18 OW data cable
RS232/RS485/RS422 interface on OW board
User equipment
19 SHDSL cable SHDSL interface on SDB board
User equipment
Orderwire telephone interface on OW board
Telephone
20 Orderwire telephone line TRK interface on OW
board
User telephone interface of PSTN or orderwire telephone interface of another SDH equipment
21 Fiber pigtail Optical connector of optical modules on main board
User equipment (ODF/Fiber box)
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 45
General Requirements for Laying External Cables
The following describes the preparations before laying external cables.
Check the appearance, factory records and quality certificates of external cables.
Check the cable specification and length according to the equipment requirement and contract requirement.
Prepare the cable connector according to the specific type of the cable interface. Generally, each external cable of the ZXMP S200 has a connector at the equipment end (End A), while the connector of some cable at the user end (End B) will be made on site after cabling, or before cabling when the cable length can be exactly determined.
Before cabling, especially when multiple cables are to be placed at the same time, prepare the cable labels and stick them firmly. If the label contents cannot be completely determined, the cables can be numbered temporarily to prevent any confusion.
All cables, that need tube protection, should be covered by protecting tube before they are placed.
The following gives the requirements for cabling operations.
Routing direction and layout position of cables should comply with the requirement of construction drawings. The length of each cable should be decided according to the actual cabling distance. The laid cables should not have broken wires or intermediate connectors.
In case of cabling, do not drag or squeeze the cable. For the cables laid along the walls, they should be properly shielded with protecting tubes.
The cables in the trough should be arranged in order, uniformly and smoothly turned. A cable with an outside diameter no greater than 12 mm should have a bending radius no less than 60 mm, while a cable with an outside diameter greater than 12 mm should have a bending radius no less than 10 times its outside diameter.
The cables should be straight, smooth, and inside the trough without blocking other cables at in/outlets. At the trough outlet or the turning position, all the cables should be bound well and fixed.
Cabling Preparation
Cabling Requirements
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
46 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
When optical fibers, cables and power cables are laid in one trough, they should be arranged separately without overlapping or mixing.
If a cable is too long, coil it at the top/bottom of the cabinet or in the middle of the trough. The coiled cable should not pile on other cables.
If the equipment is placed in a central equipment room, the cables should be laid in the middle of the building as possible. When laid vertically, the cables should be far away from the columns of the building, especially columns on four corners of the building. The distance between cables and columns should be more than 5 m. All cables laid in the equipment room should be shielded by fully sealed metal trough. Both ends of the trough are connected to two floor earth bars respectively in the equipment room.
If the equipment is installed in a far-end equipment room, the DC power cable and other cables can not be laid in parallel with the antenna feeder and AC power cable. The apparent distance between the DC power cable/other cables and the antenna feeder/AC power cable should be more than 10 m.
For power cable or other cables leading from the equipment to the outside of the equipment room, install additional surge protection units at corresponding interfaces to which these cables are connected. The grounding wire of each surge protection unit should be reliably connected to the cabinet or cover of the equipment to be protected. Multi-strand copper wires no more than 0.5 m long should be used as the grounding wires. Outdoor cables should be buried with metal jackets. Both ends of the metal jackets should be well grounded before being led into the equipment room.
The following gives the requirements which should be met while binding cables.
The ends of cables near the connectors should be bound using cable ties according to the cabling order to prevent them from being twisted together. And the cables should be bound to stay straight and smooth, with the horizontal ones bound at the same level and the vertical ones being straight, smooth and vertical to the ground after being bound, as shown in Figure 36.
F I G U R E 36 CAB L E T I E S
Cable tie
Cable Binding Requirements
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 47
The proper specification of cable ties should be used. Never try to use connected cable ties to bind the cables because it may minimize the binding strength of cable ties.
After binding, trim the remaining ends of the cable ties from the root. Do not leave sharp cuts. Figure 37 show the correct binding diagram (marked with “√”) and wrong binding diagram (marked with “×”).
F I G U R E 37 TR I M M I N G R E Q U I R E M E N T S O F C AB L E T I E
Sharp-nose Flat-head Flat-headSharp-nose
When cables are bound in strands, the space between the cable ties should be 3-4 times of the cable strand’s diameter, as shown in Figure 38.
F I G U R E 38 CAB L E T I E S F O R C AB L E S T R AN D S
d
3d - 4d
At the turning point of the cable strand, cable ties should be used at both sides of the corner to avoid breaking the cores, as shown in Figure 39.
F I G U R E 39 CAB L E T I E S F O R T H E TU R N E D C AB L E S T R AN D S
Cable tie
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
48 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Cables in the cabinet should be laid in an orderly manner from far end to the near end. It means that the far-most cables are laid first and located at the bottom of the cabling area. Avoid cable overlapping, as shown in Figure 40.
F I G U R E 40 CAB L E L AY O U T I N S I D E C AB I N E T
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 49
External Cable Layout in Cabinet
The laying sequence and route of external cables depend on their types. All the external cables of the ZXMP S200 can be classified into four groups regarding their laying sequences and routes:
Power cables
Service cables
Fiber pigtails
Network cables, BITS cables, data cables and other cables
Figure 41 shows the layout of power cables leading from the top of the cabinet.
F I G U R E 41 PO W E R C AB L E L AY O U T
1. Power cables
Power Cable Layout
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
50 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Figure 42 shows the layout of E1 service cables leading from the top of the cabinet.
F I G U R E 42 LAY O U T O F E1 C AB L E S
1. E1 cables
Service Cable Layout
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 51
Figure 43 shows the layout of fiber pigtails leading from the top of the cabinet.
F I G U R E 43 LAY O U T O F F I B E R P I G T AI L S
1. Fiber pigtails
Fiber Pigtail Layout
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
52 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Figure 44 shows the layout of network cables, BITS cables, data cables leading from the top of the cabinet.
F I G U R E 44 LAY O U T O F N E T W O R K C AB L E /B ITS C AB L E /D AT A C AB L E
1. Network cable/BITS cable/data cable
Note: Whether the external cables are led out from the top or bottom of the cabinet, the laying route of external cables belong to the same class should be consistent except the leading directions.
Network Cable/BITS Cable /Data Cable
Layout
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 53
Connecting Power Cable and Grounding Cable
Connection relation in joint grounding mode
Caution: When joint grounding mode is adopted, be sure that the grounding resistance can not be more than 1 Ω when it is installed in a central equipment room and not more than 5 Ω when installed in a far-end equipment room.
If both the working ground copper busbar and protection ground (PGND) copper busbar are available in the equipment room, connect the working ground of the ZXMP S200 to the working ground copper busbar, and the PGND and the grounding terminal at the left of the chassis to the PGND copper busbar, as shown in Figure 45.
F I G U R E 45 PO W E R C AB L E AN D GR O U N D I N G C AB L E C O N N E C T I O N O F T H E ZXMP S200 I N J O I N T GR O U N D I N G M O D E (1 )
-48V -48VGND PGNDGrounding
terminal
ZXMP S200Power equipment
-48V-48VGND
Working ground copper busbar
Protection ground copper busbar
Grounding busbar
Earth network
If only one grounding copper busbar is available in the equipment room, the working ground, PGND and the chassis shell of the ZXMP S200 are all connected to the grounding copper busbar, as shown in Figure 46.
Connection Relation
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
54 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 46 PO W E R C AB L E AN D GR O U N D I N G C AB L E C O N N E C T I O N O F T H E ZXMP S200 I N J O I N T GR O U N D I N G M O D E (2 )
-48V -48VGND PGNDGrounding
terminal
ZXMP S200Power equipment
-48V-48VGND
Grounding copper busbar
Earth network
Note: If the ZXMP S200 is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, connect the power cable to the subrack power output port in the cabinet, and connect the protection grounding cable to the grounding busbar of the 19-inch cabinet.
Connection relation in independent grounding mode
Caution: When independent grounding mode is adopted, be sure that the grounding resistances meet the requirements described in Table 15.
T AB L E 15 GR O U N D I N G R E S I S T AN C E R E Q U I R E M E N T S I N IN D E P E N D E N T GR O U N D I N G MO D E
Grounding Resistance Value (Ω)
AC working ground resistance ≤4
DC working ground resistance ≤4
Security protection ground resistance ≤4
Lightning protection ground resistance ≤4
Important! The voltage between the protection ground terminal and the working ground terminal of the ZXMP S200 should be less than 50 mV.
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 55
In the independent grounding mode, the working ground of the ZXMP S200 is connected to the DC working ground in the equipment room, while the protection ground (PGND) and the cover of the chassis are connected to the security protection ground in the equipment room, as shown in Figure 47.
F I G U R E 47 PO W E R C AB L E AN D GR O U N D I N G C AB L E C O N N E C T I O N O F T H E ZXMP S200 I N I N D E P E N D E N T GR O U N D I N G M O D E
-48V -48VGND PGNDGrounding
terminal
ZXMP S200Power equipment
-48V-48VGND
Grounding copper busbar
Grounding copper busbar
DC working ground
Security protection ground
The following introduces -48 V/-60 V DC power/grounding cable, +24 V DC power/grounding cable, AC power cable and protection grounding cable.
-48 V/-60 V DC power/grounding cable
The -48 V/-60 V DC power/grounding cable of the ZXMP S200 use 1.5 mm2 multi-strand conductors in black and blue coat respectively, as shown in Figure 48.
F I G U R E 48 -48 V / -60 V DC P O W E R /GR O U N D I N G C AB L E
1 2 3 4
End A End B
1. 3-pin D-type straight solder plug
2. -48 V/-60 V DC grounding cable (black)
3. -48 V/-60 V DC power cable (blue)
4. Connector
Cable Description
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
56 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The connector at the End A of the cable, which is a 3-pin D-type straight solder plug (hole-pin-hole), is connected to the DC power socket on the PWA board.
The End B connector of the power cable is made on site according to the interface type of power equipment actually used in the equipment room. It is usually connected to the output port of the power distribution unit in the cabinet or other power equipment provided in the equipment room.
Table 16 lists the signal definition and color code of the -48 V/ -60 V DC power/grounding cable.
T AB L E 16 S I G N AL D E F I N I T I O N AN D C O L O R C O D E O F -48 V / -60 V DC P O W E R /GR O U N D I N G C AB L E
Pin (End A) Signal Definition Color Code of Cable
A1 -48 V/-60 V GND Black
A2 PGND -
A3 -48 V/-60 V Blue
Note: The pin A1 and A2 are short circuited.
+24 V DC power/grounding cable
The +24 V DC power/grounding cable of the ZXMP S200 use 1.5 mm2 multi-strand conductors in black and red coat respectively, as shown in Figure 49.
F I G U R E 49 +24 V DC P O W E R /GR O U N D I N G C AB L E
1 2 3 4
End A End B
1. 3-pin D-type straight solder plug
2. +24 V DC grounding cable (black)
3. +24 V DC power cable (red)
4. Connector
The connector at the End A of the cable, which is a 3-pin D-type straight solder plug (hole-pin-hole), is connected to the DC power socket on the PWB board.
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 57
The End B connector of the power cable is made on site according to the interface type of power equipment actually used in the equipment room. It is usually connected to the output port of the power distribution unit in the cabinet or other power equipment provided in the equipment room.
Table 17 lists the signal definition and color code of the +24V DC power/grounding cable.
T AB L E 17 S I G N AL D E F I N I T I O N AN D C O L O R C O D E O F +24 V DC P O W E R /GR O U N D I N G C AB L E
Pin (End A) Signal Definition Color Code of Cable
A1 +24 V Red
A2 PGND -
A3 +24 VGND Black
Note: The pin A2 and A3 are short circuited.
AC power cable
The AC power cable of the ZXMP S200 is a 0.75 mm2 conductor, as shown in Figure 50.
F I G U R E 50 AC P O W E R C AB L E
End BEnd A
The End A of the AC power cable is equipped with a standard AC power female plug, which is connected to the AC power socket on the PWC board.
The End B connector of the AC power cable is made on site according to the interface type of power equipment actually used in the equipment room. It is usually connected to the output port of the power distribution unit in the cabinet or other power equipment provided in the equipment room.
Protection grounding cable
The protection grounding cable of the ZXMP S200 is 2.5 mm2
multi-strand conductor in yellow-green coat, as shown in Figure 51.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
58 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 51 PR O T E C T I O N GR O U N D I N G C AB L E
End A 1 End B
1. Hot shrink tube
The connector at End A of the protection grounding cable is an RV3-4 lug, which is connected to the grounding terminal on the left side of the chassis.
The connector at End B is connected to the protection ground in the equipment room, which is made on site according to the specific interface type actually used.
1. Determine the port position of the power supply loop which provides power to the equipment and the connection position of the grounding busbar according to the design requirements in the construction drawing and the opinions of the construction unit.
2. Prepare the power cable and grounding cable with proper length according to the design requirements in the construction drawing and the actual site conditions.
3. Label both ends of the power cable and lay the cable along the cabling route.
Be sure to shut down the power supply and power off the equipment. And then connect the equipment end (End A) of the power cable to the power socket on the power board, and connect the grounding wire to the grounding terminal on the left side of the ZXMP S200 chassis.
4. Check the type of the power port and the grounding busbar, make the user-end (End B) connectors of the power cable and grounding wire.
5. Connect the End B connector of the power cable and the protection grounding wire to the power distribution unit or power equipment according to the connection relationship introduced above.
Caution:
Do not confuse the power cables. Connect them according to their colors. Otherwise, it may result in damage!
Be cautious not to use the DC power cable for the PWA board to connect the PWB board.
END OF STEPS.
Connection Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 59
Connecting E1 Cable
The ZXMP S200 provides two types of E1 cables: 75 Ω E1 cable and 120 Ω E1 cable.
The following introduces these two cables respectively.
75 Ω E1 cable
75 Ω E1 cable is an 8-core 75 Ω micro coaxial cable. The structure of the cable is illustrated in Figure 52.
F I G U R E 52 ST R U C T U R E O F 75 Ω E1 C AB L E
1. 50-pin D-type lateral injection molding plug
2. 8-core 75 Ω micro coaxial cable A
3. 8-core 75 Ω micro coaxial cable B
4. 8-core 75 Ω micro coaxial cable C
5. Label
The End A of the 75 Ω E1 cable is equipped with a 50-pin D-type lateral injection modeling plug. It is used to connect E1 electrical interface on the main board or ET1 board.
The End B connector is made on site according to actual requirements, which is connected to DDF or other user equipment.
Figure 53 illustrates the pin layout of the 50-pin D-type plug, and Table 18 lists the signal definition of these pins and connection relation of the cable.
F I G U R E 53 P I N S O F T H E 50 -P I N D-TY P E PL U G
Pin1 Pin25
Pin26 Pin50
Cable Description
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
60 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
T AB L E 18 S I G N AL D E F I N I T I O N S AN D C O N N E C T I O N S O F 75 Ω E1 C AB L E
Pin 25 50 24 49
Micro coaxial cable A
A-1 core A-1 shield A-2 core A-2 shield
Signal definition R1+ R1- T1+ T1-
Pin 23 48 22 47
Micro coaxial cable A
A-3 core A-3 shield A-4 core A-3 shield
Signal definition R2+ R2- T2+ T2-
Pin 21 46 20 45
Micro coaxial cable A
A-5 core A-5 shield A-6 core A-6 shield
Signal definition R3+ R3- T3+ T3-
Pin 19 44 18 43
Micro coaxial cable A
A-7 core A-7 shield A-8 core A-8 shield
Signal definition R4+ R4- T4+ T4-
Pin 17 42 16 41
Micro coaxial cable B
B-1 core B-1 shield B-2 core B-2 shield
Signal definition R5+ R5- T5+ T5-
Pin 15 40 14 39
Micro coaxial cable B
B-3 core B-3 shield B-4 core B-4 shield
Signal definition R6+ R6- T6+ T6-
Pin 13 38 12 37
Micro coaxial cable B
B-5 core B-5 shield B-6 core B-6 shield
Signal definition R7+ R7- T7+ T7-
Pin 11 36 10 35
Micro coaxial cable B
B-7 core B-7 shield B-8 core B-8 shield
Signal definition R8+ R8- T8+ T8-
Pin 9 34 8 33
Micro coaxial cable C
C-1 core C-1 shield C-2 core C-2 shield
Signal definition R9+ R9- T9+ T9-
Pin 7 32 6 31
Micro coaxial cable C
C-3 core C-3 shield C-4 core C-4 shield
Signal definition R10+ R10- T10+ T10-
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 61
Pin 5 30 4 29
Micro coaxial cable C
C-5 core C-5 shield C-6 core C-6 shield
Signal definition R11+ R11- T11+ T11-
Pin 3 28 2 27
Micro coaxial cable C
C-7 core C-7 shield C-8 core C-8 shield
Signal definition R12+ R12- T12+ T12-
Note:
R+: receiving, positive; R-: receiving, negative
T+: transmitting, positive; T-: transmitting, negative
A-1: the No.1 wire of the 8-core 75 Ω micro coaxial cable A, and so forth
120 Ω E1 cable
The 120 Ω E1 cable is a 16-core 120 Ω trunk cable. The structure of the cable is illustrated in Figure 54.
F I G U R E 54 ST R U C T U R E O F 120 Ω E1 C AB L E
5
End A End B
1 2 3 4
1. 50-pin D-type lateral injection molding plug
2. 16-core 120 Ω trunk cable A
3. 16-core 120 Ω trunk cable B
4. 16-core 120 Ω trunk cable C
5. Label
The End A of the 120 Ω E1 cable is equipped with a 50-pin D-type lateral injection modeling plug. It is used to connect E1 electrical interface on the main board or ET1 board.
The End B connector is made on site according to actual requirements, which is connected to DDF or other user equipment.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
62 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Table 19 lists the signal definition of the plug’s pins and color codes of the cable.
T AB L E 19 S I G N AL D E F I N I T I O N S AN D C O L O R C O D E S O F 120 Ω E1 C AB L E
Pin 25 50 24 49
Trunk cable A Blue-black 1
Blue-red 1
Pink-black 1
Pink 1
Signal definition
R1+ R1- T1+ T1-
Pin 23 48 22 47
Trunk cable A Green-black 1
Green-red 1
Orange-black 1
Orange-red 1
Signal definition
R2+ R2- T2+ T2-
Pin 21 46 20 45
Trunk cble A Grey-black 1
Grey-red 1
Blue-black 2
Blue-red 2
Signal definition
R3+ R3- T3+ T3-
Pin 19 44 18 43
Trunk cable A Pink-black 2
Pink 2 Green-black 2
Green-red 2
Signal definition
R4+ R4- T4+ T4-
Pin 17 42 16 41
Trunk cable B Blue-black 1
Blue-red 1
Pink-black 1
Pink 1
Signal definition
R5+ R5- T5+ T5-
Pin 15 40 14 39
Trunk cable B Green-black 1
Green-red 1
Orange-black 1
Orange-red 1
Signal definition
R6+ R6- T6+ T6-
Pin 13 38 12 37
Trunk cable B Grey-black 1
Grey-red 1
Blue-black 2
Blue-red 2
Signal definition
R7+ R7- T7+ T7-
Pin 11 36 10 35
Trunk cable B Pink-black 2
Pink 2 Green-black 2
Green-red 2
Signal definition
R8+ R8- T8+ T8-
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 63
Pin 9 34 8 33
Trunk cable C Blue-black 1
Blue-red 1
Pink-black 1
Pink 1
Signal definition
R9+ R9- T9+ T9-
Pin 7 32 6 31
Trunk cable C Green-black 1
Green-red 1
Orange-black 1
Orange-red 1
Signal definition
R10+ R10- T10+ T10-
Pin 5 30 4 29
Trunk cable C Grey-black 1
Grey-red 1
Blue-black 2
Blue-red 2
Signal definition
R11+ R11- T11+ T11-
Pin 3 28 2 27
Trunk cable C Pink-black 2
Pink 2 Green-black 2
Green-red 2
Signal definition
R12+ R12- T12+ T12-
Note:
R+: receiving, positive; R-: receiving, negative;
T+: transmitting, positive; T-: transmitting, negative
The format of color code is “color 1-color 2 +numeral”, where “color 1” is the background color of the core’s coat, “color 2” is the color of small square shape(s) on the core’s coat, the numeral is the number of small square shape(s) distributed on the coat every section. For example, “blue-black 2” means the background color of core’s coat is blue and there are two black square shapes distributed on the coat every section.
1. According to the route specified in the construction drawing, lay the E1 cable from the user equipment, such as a DDF, to the cable inlet of the ZXMP S200.
2. Connect the equipment-end connector of E1 cable to corresponding interface on the main board or ET1 board of ZXMP S200.
If the ZXMP S200 is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, lay and connect the cable according to the following requirements.
i. For top cabling mode, lead the equipment end of the E1 cable into the cabinet from the top of the cabinet.
For bottom cabling mode, lead the equipment end of the E1 cable from the bottom of the cabinet.
ii. Lay the E1 cable along the right side of the cabinet to corresponding interface on the main board or ET1 board of the ZXMP S200 mounted in the cabinet. Then connect
Connection Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
64 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
the connector to the interface and fasten the screws on the connector.
iii. Arrange the E1 cable and other service cables in the same direction rightwards. Strap these cables with cable ties at the position 150 mm from the connector. For front-mounted ZXMP S200 chassis, the bending radius at the root part of the cable is relatively small, so it is needed to strip 300 mm-500 mm of cable coat.
iv. Fix the cables in the cabling clamp of the cabinet in order.
3. After the cables are connected properly with the ZXMP S200, extend the cable to the user equipment.
Note: Keep the cable smooth and straight along the cabling route without coiling or stacking.
4. Along the cabling route, fix the cables with cable ties according to the requirements for binding cables.
5. Lead the cable into the user equipment, such as a DDF.
6. Make the user-end connector on site according to the interface to be connected on the user equipment.
7. Connect the connector to the user equipment.
END OF STEPS.
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 65
Connecting T1 Cable
The T1 cable is a 32-core electrical cable. The structure of the cable is illustrated in Figure 55.
F I G U R E 55 ST R U C T U R E O F T1 C AB L E
4
End A End B
1 2 3
1. 50-pin D-type lateral injection molding plug 2. 32-core cable A 3. 32-core cable B 4. Label
The End A of the T1 cable is equipped with a 50-pin D-type lateral injection modeling plug. It is used to connect T1 electrical interface on the main board.
The End B connector is made on site according to actual requirements, which is connected to DDF or other user equipment. Table 20 lists the signal definition of the plug’s pins and color codes of the cable.
T AB L E 20 S I G N AL D E F I N I T I O N S AN D C O L O R C O D E S O F T1 C AB L E
Pin 25 50 24 49
32-core cable A White Blue White Orange
Signal definition R1+ R1- T1+ T1-
Pin 23 48 22 47
32-core cable A White Green White Brown
Signal definition R2+ R2- T2+ T2-
Pin 21 46 20 45
32-core cable A Red Blue Red Orange
Signal definition R3+ R3- T3+ T3-
Pin 19 44 18 43
32-core cable A Red Green Red Brown
Signal definition R4+ R4- T4+ T4-
Cable Description
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
66 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Pin 17 42 16 41
32-core cable A Black Blue Black Orange
Signal definition R5+ R5- T5+ T5-
Pin 15 40 14 39
32-core cable A Black Green Black Brown
Signal definition R6+ R6- T6+ T6-
Pin 13 38 12 37
32-core cable A Yellow Blue Yellow Orange
Signal definition R7+ R7- T7+ T7-
Pin 11 36 10 35
32-core cable A Yellow Green Yellow Brown
Signal definition R8+ R8- T8+ T8-
Pin 9 34 8 33
32-core cable B White Blue White Orange
Signal definition R9+ R9- T9+ T9-
Pin 7 32 6 31
32-core cable B White Green White Brown
Signal definition R10+ R10- T10+ T10-
Pin 5 30 4 29
32-core cable B Red Blue Red Orange
Signal definition R11+ R11- T11+ T11-
Pin 3 28 2 27
32-core cable B Red Green Red Brown
Signal definition R12+ R12- T12+ T12-
Note:
R+: receiving, positive;
R-: receiving, negative;
T+: transmitting, positive;
T-: transmitting, negative.
The laying and connection steps of T1 cable are similar to those of E1 cable. Please refer to the section “General Requirements for Laying External Cables” and “Connecting E1 Cable” for detailed layout requirements and connection steps.
Connection Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 67
Connecting Network Cable
The super category-5 shielded data cable is used as the network cable, as shown in Figure 56.
F I G U R E 56 ST R U C T U R E O F N E T W O R K C AB L E
RJ45 plug RJ45 plug
A
A view
1
8
In terms of color code connection relation, network cables can be divided into two types, crossover network cable and straight-through network cable.
Crossover network cable
The crossover cable serves to connect the ZXMP S200 to the EMS computer. Both ends of it are equipped with an RJ45 plug. The equipment end plug is connected to the EMS interface socket (Qx) on the backplane while the other connected to the EMS computer.
Table 21 shows the color code connection relation of the crossover network cable.
T AB L E 21 C O L O R C O D E C O N N E C T I O N R E L AT I O N O F C R O S S O V E R N E T W O R K C AB L E
Pin No. of RJ45 Plug at Equipment End (End A)
Color Code of Category-5 Network Cable
Pin No. of RJ45 Plug at User End (End B)
1 White-orange 3
2 Orange 6
3 White-green 1
6 Green 2
4 Blue 4
5 White-blue 5
7 White-brown 7
8 Brown 8
Straight-through network cable
The straight-through cable serves to connect the ZXMP S200 with the EMS computer through a HUB. Both ends of it are equipped with a RJ45 plug. The equipment end plug is connected to the EMS interface socket (Qx) on the backplane
Cable Description
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
68 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
while the other connected to the network equipment, such as a HUB.
Table 22 shows the color code connection relation of the straight-through network cable.
T AB L E 22 C O L O R C O D E C O N N E C T I O N R E L AT I O N O F S T R AI G H T -T H R O U G H C AB L E
Pin No. of RJ45 Plug at Equipment End (End A)
Color Code of Category-5 Network Cable
Pin No. of RJ45 Plug at User End (End B)
1 White-orange 1
2 Orange 2
3 White-green 3
6 Green 6
4 Blue 4
5 White-blue 5
7 White-brown 7
8 Brown 8
The laying and connecting steps of network cable are similar to those of E1 cable. Please refer to the section “General Requirements for Laying External Cables” and “Connecting E1 Cable” for detailed layout requirements and connection steps.
Connecting 75 Ω BITS Cable
The 75 Ω BITS cable is a 75 Ω single-strand coaxial cable, as illustrated in Figure 57.
F I G U R E 57 75 Ω B ITS C AB L E
End A End B
The End A of the 75 Ω BITS cable is equipped with a 1.0/2.3 straight crimp plug (male), which is used to connect the 75 Ω BITS interface (Tx/Rx) of the main board. The End B connector is made on site according to actual requirements, which is connected to user equipment.
Connection Steps
Cable Description
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 69
The laying and connecting steps of the 75 Ω BITS cable are similar to those of E1 cable. Please refer to the section “General Requirements for Laying External Cables” and “Connecting E1 Cable” for detailed layout requirements and connection steps.
Connecting RS232 Cable (120 Ω BITS Cable)
The RS232 (120 Ω BITS) cable is an 8-core 120 Ω cable with both ends equipped with RJ45 plugs, as illustrated in Figure 56.
The equipment end (End A) RJ45 plug is connected to the RS232 interface or 120 Ω BITS interface (232), while the user end (End B) RJ45 plug is connected to user equipment. If the use end plug of the cable does not match the actual interface of user equipment, new End B connector should be made on site.
Table 23 shows the color code connection relation of the RS232 cable (120 Ω BITS cable).
T AB L E 23 C O L O R C O D E C O N N E C T I O N R E L AT I O N O F RS232 C AB L E
Pin No. of RJ45 Plug
End A End B
Color Code of 8-Core 120 Ω Cable
Signal Definition
1 1 White TxD: RS232 data transmitting
2 2 Orange RS232 reference ground
3 3 White RxD: RS232 data receiving
4 4 Blue R-: BITS clock receiving (negative)
5 5 White R+: BITS clock receiving (positive)
6 6 Green GND
7 7 White T+: BITS clock transmitting (positive)
8 8 Brown T-: BITS clock transmitting (negative)
The laying and connecting steps of the RS232 (120 Ω BITS) cable are similar to those of E1 cable. Please refer to the section “General Requirements for Laying External Cables” and “Connecting E1 Cable” for detailed layout requirements and connection steps.
Connection Steps
Cable Description
Connection Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
70 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Connecting Alarm Output Cable
The alarm output cable is a level twisted pair cable (digital), as shown in Figure 58.
F I G U R E 58 ST R U C T U R E O F AL AR M OU T P U T C AB L E
RJ11 plug
A
A view
1
6
Connect the equipment end (RJ11 plug) of the cable to the alarm output interface (OUT) on the main board, while connect the user end connector, which is made on site, to the user equipment.
Table 24 lists the color code connection relation of the alarm output cable.
T AB L E 24 C O L O R C O D E C O N N E C T I O N R E L AT I O N O F AL AR M OU T P U T C AB L E
Pin No. of RJ11 Plug
End A End B
Color Code of Cable
Signal Definition
1 1 White MAJ+: critical alarm (positive)
2 2 Blue MAJ-: critical alarm (negative)
3 3 White MIN+: major/minor alarm (positive)
4 4 Yellow MIN-: major/minor (negative)
The laying and connecting steps of the alarm output cable are similar to those of E1 cable. Please refer to the section “General Requirements for Laying External Cables” and “Connecting E1 Cable” for detailed layout requirements and connection steps.
Cable Description
Connection Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 71
Connecting Alarm Input Cable
The alarm input cable is a straight-through shielded network cable, either end of which is a RJ45 plug. Connect one end of the cable to the alarm input interface (IN) on the main board, while connect the other end to the user equipment. If the use end plug of the cable does not match the actual interface of user equipment, new End B connector should be made on site.
Table 25 lists the color code connection relation of the alarm input cable.
T AB L E 25 C O L O R C O D E C O N N E C T I O N R E L AT I O N O F AL AR M I N P U T C AB L E
Pin No. of RJ45 Plug
End A End B
Color Code of Cable
Signal Definition
1 1 White-orange
Smoke+: smoke alarm (positive), on-off signal
2 2 Orange Smoke-: smoke alarm (negative), on-off signal
3 3 White-green
Door+: entrance alarm (positive), on-off signal
4 4 Blue Door-: entrance alarm (negative), on-off signal
5 5 White-blue Fire+: fire alarm (positive), on-off signal
6 6 Green Fire-: fire alarm (negative), on-off signal
7 7 White-brown
Tem+: temperature alarm (positive), on-off signal
8 8 Brown Tem-: temperature alarm (negative), on-off signal
The laying and connecting steps of the alarm input cable are similar to those of E1 cable. Please refer to the section “General Requirements for Laying External Cables” and “Connecting E1 Cable” for detailed layout requirements and connection steps.
Cable Description
Connection Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
72 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Connecting E3/T3 Cable
The E3/T3 cable is a 75 Ω single-strand coaxial cable (SYV-75-2-1/0.32), as shown in Figure 59.
F I G U R E 59 ST R U C T U R E O F E3 /T3 C AB L E
End A End B
The End A of the cable is equipped with a 1.0/2.3 straight crimp male plug, which is used to connect the electrical transmit/receive interface on the EIE3 board.
The End B connector of the cable is made on site, which is connected to user equipment, such as a DDF.
The laying and connecting steps of the E3/T3 cable are similar to those of E1 cable. Please refer to the section “General Requirements for Laying External Cables” and “Connecting E1 Cable” for detailed layout requirements and connection steps.
Connecting FE Data Cable
The FE data cable is an FTP super category-5 shielded data cable, either end of which is an RJ45 plug.
The equipment end (End A) of the FE data cable is connected to the FE interface on the main board or FE interface on an Ethernet interface board, while the user end (End B) connected to user equipment.
Table 26 lists the color code connection relation of the FE data cable.
T AB L E 26 C O L O R C O D E C O N N E C T I O N R E L AT I O N O F FE D AT A C AB L E
Pin No. of RJ45 Plug at Equipment End (End A)
Color Code of Category-5 Shielded Cable
Pin No. of RJ45 Plug at User End (End B)
Signal Definition
1 White-orange 1 Rx+/Tx+
2 Orange 2 Rx-/Tx-
3 White-green 3 Tx+/Rx+
6 Green 6 Tx-/Rx-
Cable Description
Connection Steps
Cable Description
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 73
Pin No. of RJ45 Plug at Equipment End (End A)
Color Code of Category-5 Shielded Cable
Pin No. of RJ45 Plug at User End (End B)
Signal Definition
4 Blue 4 -
5 White-blue 5 -
7 White-brown 7 -
8 Brown 8 -
Note:
Rx+: receiving, positive; Rx-: receiving, negative;
T+x: transmitting, positive; Tx-: transmitting, negative
FE interface supports the AutoMDIX function of the FE data cables. It can recognize the transmission direction of signal from the opposite user equipment, i.e. whether it is a received signal or a transmitted one.
The signal in core 1 and 3 should be positive (+) while that in core 2 and 6 should be negative (-). And the signal in core 1 and 2 should be either received signal (Rx) or transmitted signal (Tx) at the same time, while the signal in core 3 and 6 be either transmitted (Tx) one or received one (Rx).
The laying and connecting steps of the FE data cable are similar to those of E1 cable. Please refer to the section “General Requirements for Laying External Cables” and “Connecting E1 Cable” for detailed layout requirements and connection steps.
Connecting V.35 Cable
The V.35 cable is a 26-core single-strand round cable, as shown in Figure 60.
F I G U R E 60 ST R U C T U R E O F V .35 C AB L E
End A End B
The End A of the V.35 cable is equipped with a 26-pin D-type flat cable IDC crimp plug (blade pin), as shown in Figure 61, which is used to connect the V.35 interface on the V35B board.
Connection Steps
Cable Description
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
74 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The End B of the cable is equipped with a V.35 male (or female) plug, which is connected to corresponding V.35 interface on user equipment.
F I G U R E 61 P I N S L AY O U T O F V .35 C AB L E P L U G
Table 27 lists the color code and signal definition of cores in the V.35 cable as well as the connection relation between End A and End B connectors.
T AB L E 27 S I G N AL D E F I N I T I O N AN D C O L O R C O D E O F V .35 C AB L E
Pin No. of Plug
End A End B
Color Code of V.35 Cable
Signal Definition
1 12 White TXDA
2 4 Blue TXDB
3 29 White RDA
4 21 Orange RDB
5 14 White TXCCA
6 6 Green TXCCB
7 13 White TXCA
8 5 Brown TXCB
9 30 Red RXCA
10 22 Blue RXCB
25 9 Yellow Ground
26 26 Blue Ground
Note: The “T” in the signal definition means transmitting; while “R” means
receiving.
The “A” and “B” in the signal definition refer to a pair of differential wire.
The laying and connecting steps of the V.35 cable are similar to those of E1 cable. Please refer to the section “General Requirements for Laying External Cables” and “Connecting E1 Cable” for detailed layout requirements and connection steps.
Connection Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 75
Connecting AI Data Cable
The AI data cable is a 26-core single strand round cable, as shown in Figure 62.
F I G U R E 62 AI D AT A C AB L E
End A End B
The End A of the AI data cable is equipped with a 26-pin D-type flat cable IDC crimp plug (blade pin), as shown in Figure 63, which is used to connect the audio interface of AI board.
The End B connector of the cable is made on site, which is used to connect user equipment.
F I G U R E 63 P I N S L AY O U T O F AI D AT A C AB L E P L U G
Table 28 lists the color code and signal definition of cores in the AI data cable.
T AB L E 28 C O L O R C O D E AN D S I G N AL D E F I N I T I O N O F AI D AT A C AB L E
End A Pin No.
Color Code
Signal Definition
End A Pin No.
Color Code
Signal Definition
1 White ALINE1 14 Green BLINE1
2 Blue ALINEG1 15 Red BLINEG1
3 White ALINE2 16 Brown BLINE2
4 Orange ALINEG2 17 Black BLINEG2
5 White ALINE3 18 Blue BLINE3
6 Green ALINEG3 19 Black BLINEG3
7 White ALINE4 20 Range BLINE4
Cable Description
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
76 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
End A Pin No.
Color Code
Signal Definition
End A Pin No.
Color Code
Signal Definition
8 Brown ALINEG4 21 Black BLINEG4
9 Red ALINE5 22 Green BLINE5
10 Blue ALINEG5 23 Black BLINEG5
11 Red ALINE6 24 Brown BLINE6
12 Orange ALINEG6 25 Yellow BLINEG6
13 Red PGND 26 Blue PGND
Note:
ALINEn/ALINEGn (n=1-6) correspond to transmit and receive signal lines of two-line audio interface, or transmit signal line pair of four-line audio interface. There is no polarity requirement when they are connected.
BLINEn/BLINEGn (n=1-6) correspond to receive signal line pair of four-line audio interface. When corresponding to two-line audio interface, they will not be used. There is no polarity requirement when they are connected.
PGND represents for protection ground.
The definition of transmit and receive is relative to the AI board.
The laying and connecting steps of the AI data cable are similar to those of E1 cable. Please refer to the section “General Requirements for Laying External Cables” and “Connecting E1 Cable” for detailed layout requirements and connection steps.
Connection Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 77
Connecting OW Data Cable
The OW data cable is a 26-core digital cable used for switches, as shown in Figure 64.
F I G U R E 64 OW D AT A C AB L E
End A End B
The End A of the OW data cable is equipped with a 26-pin D-type flat cable IDC crimp plug (blade pin), as shown in Figure 65, which is used to connect the RS232/RS485/RS422 interface of OW board.
The End B connector of the cable is made on site, which is used to connect user equipment.
F I G U R E 65 P I N S L AY O U T O F OW D AT A C A B L E P L U G
Table 29 lists the color code and signal definition of cores in the OW data cable.
T AB L E 29 C O L O R C O D E AN D S I G N AL D E F I N I T I O N O F OW D AT A C AB L E
End A Pin No. Color Code Signal Definition
1 White RS232_R1/RS422_R1+/RS485+_1
2 Blue RS232_T1/RS422_R1-/RS485-_1
3 White GND
4 Orange RS232_R2/RS422_T1+/RS485+_2
5 White RS232_T2/RS422_T1-/RS485-_2
Cable Description
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
78 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
End A Pin No. Color Code Signal Definition
6 Green GND
7 White RS232_R3/RS422_R2+/RS485+_3
8 Brown RS232_T3/RS422_R2-/RS485-_3
9 Red GND
10 Blue RS232_R4/RS422_T2+/RS485+_4
11 Red RS232_T4/RS422_T2-/RS485-_4
12 Orange GND
13 Red GND
14 Green RS232_R5/RS422_R3+/RS485+_5
15 Red RS232_T5/RS422_R3-/RS485-_5
16 Brown GND
17 Black RS232_R6/RS422_T3+/RS485+_6
18 Blue RS232_T6/RS422_T3-/RS485-_6
Note:
RS232_Tx (x=1-6) represents for the xth transmit channel of RS232 signal, while RS232_Rx (x=1-6) represents for the xth receive channel of RS232 signal.
RS422_Tx+ (x=1-3) represents for the positive polarity of the xth transmit channel, while RS422_Tx- (x=1-3) represents for the negative polarity of the xth transmit channel.
RS422_Rx+ (x=1-3) represents for the positive polarity of the xth receive channel, while RS422_Rx- (x=1-3) represents for the negative polarity of the xth receive channel.
RS485+_x (x=1-6) represents for the positive polarity of the xth channel, while RS485-_x (x=1-6) represents for the negative polarity of the xth channel.
GND represents for ground.
The pins 19 to 26 are not used.
The definition of transmit and receive is relative to the OW board.
The laying and connecting steps of the OW data cable are similar to those of E1 cable. Please refer to the section “General Requirements for Laying External Cables” and “Connecting E1 Cable” for detailed layout requirements and connection steps.
Connection Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 79
Connecting SHDSL Cable
A two-core telephone line is used as the SHDSL cable, as shown in Figure 66.
F I G U R E 66 SHDSL C AB L E
End A
A
A view
1
8
End B
RJ45 plug RJ11 plug
The End A of the SHDSL cable is equipped with an 8P8C straight crimp plug (i.e. RJ45 plug), as shown in Figure 66, which is used to connect the SHDSL port on the SDB board.
The End B of the SHDSL cable is equipped with a 6P6C straight crimp plug (i.e. RJ11 plug), which is used to connect user equipment.
Table 30 lists the color code of cores and signal definition of pins of the SHDSL cable.
T AB L E 30 C O L O R C O D E AN D S I G N AL D E F I N I T I O N O F SHDSL C AB L E
Pin No. of Plug
End A End B
Color Code of SHDSL Cable
Signal Definition
4 3 Green TIP A: A signal line of SHDSL port A
5 4 Red RIGN B: B signal line of SHDSL port B
Note: All the other pins that are not listed in the above table are impending.
The laying and connecting steps of the SHDSL cable are similar to those of E1 cable. Please refer to the section “General Requirements for Laying External Cables” and “Connecting E1 Cable” for detailed layout requirements and connection steps.
Cable Description
Connection Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
80 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Connecting Fiber Pigtail
Both ends of a fiber pigtail are equipped with an optic fiber connector.
Table 31 lists different types of optic fiber connector.
T AB L E 31 C O M M O N OP T I C F I B E R C O N N E C T O R S
Type Description Picture
FC/PC Round fiber connector/polished slightly convex sphere
FC/APC Round fiber connector/polished convex sphere at 8o
SC/PC Square fiber connector/polished slightly convex sphere
SC/APC Square fiber connector/polished convex sphere at 8o
ST/PC Round bayonet fiber connector /polished slightly convex sphere
ST/APC Round bayonet fiber connector/ polished convex sphere at 8o
MT-RJ Square bayonet fiber connector
LC/PC Square bayonet fiber connector /polished slightly convex sphere
The optical interfaces on the front panel of the ZXMP S200 main board are equipped with LC/PC optic fiber connectors.
Optical Fiber Connector
Types
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 81
Caution: Optical fiber has a delicate structure. It should be held or put with care during fiber connection. Be sure not to drag, press, squeeze fiber by force or overbend it. Avoid breaking or damaging optical fiber.
Laser: During optical fiber operation, do not look straight at the laser beam of the optical interface or inside the optical fiber to avoid damage to eyes.
1. Before connecting fiber pigtails, check their appearance, factory record and quality certification. Make sure the specification, length and connectors of fiber pigtails meet the design and contract requirements.
2. Design the layout route of fiber pigtails according to the positions of the optical interfaces to be connected and also consider possible future expansions.
3. Draw a connection diagram based on the equipment networking, and mark the optical receive and transmit interface serial number for each optical connection in the diagram.
4. Prepare fiber pigtail labels and stick the labels properly and firmly.
5. Lay the protection pipes before the fiber pigtails are laid. Each protection pipe can hold multiple pigtails, but no more than twelve. Protection pipe length should be decided according to the construction design and actual situation.
6. Tie the fiber pigtails with nylon adhesive hook-and-loop tape before putting them through the pipe and pay attention to protect the fiber connectors.
Note: Fiber pigtails connected to different equipment should be put through the pipe separately.
END OF STEPS.
Before laying and connecting fiber pigtails, make sure the following operations have been finished.
All the other cables have been laid.
The fiber connection drawing based on the actual networking has been completed, which should indicate the serial numbers of start and end optical interfaces for each fiber pigtail.
1. Lay the fiber pigtails from the user equipment (such as ODF) to the cable inlet of the ZXMP S200 according to the designed route in the construction drawing.
If the ZXMP S200 is installed in 19-inch cabinet, lay the fiber pigtails according to special requirements for fiber pigtail cabling in cabinet.
Preparations
Prerequisite
Connection Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
82 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Note:
For a central equipment room, external optical cables in the cable vault must be connected to the earth busbar through lead-in connection devices before being led into the equipment room.
For a far-end equipment room, external optical cables must be connected to the protection grounding busbar or outdoor lightning protection ground through optical termination box, which is connected to the protection grounding busbar or earth network with bunched copper wires with cross section area no less than 16 mm2.
2. Lead the fiber pigtails to corresponding optical interfaces of the ZXMP S200 according to fiber pigtail labels and fiber connection drawing.
3. Clean fiber connectors with dust-free paper dipped in absolute alcohol before plugging. Be careful to wipe it in one direction.
4. Follow the steps below to plug the connectors of fiber pigtails to corresponding interfaces of the ZXMP S200.
i. Nip the connector of a fiber pigtail with thumb and forefinger and align it with corresponding optical interface on the board.
ii. Plug the connector completely in the interface with proper force.
END OF STEPS.
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 83
Connecting Orderwire Telephone Line
To connect the orderwire telephone line so as to implement the orderwire function
Note: The ZXMP S200 supports common orderwire function and trunk function. The trunk function can be used to implement the orderwire function between two SDH NEs withoud optical connections or the communication between SDH orderwire and PSTN.
Make sure that all cables and fiber pigtails have been laid well before laying the orderwire telephone line.
To connect an orderwire telephone:
i. Connect the RJ11 plug of the telephone line to the orderwire telephone interface (identified with PHONE) on the OW board;
ii. Connect the other end of the telephone line to the orderwire telephone.
END OF STEPS.
To connect the ZXMP S200 to another SDH NE for orderwire function with the telephone line:
i. Connect the RJ11 plug of the telephone line to the TRK interface on the OW board;
ii. Connect the other end of the telephone line to the orderwire interface of the other SDH NE. For example, connect the other end to the PHONE interface on the OW board of another ZXMP S200.
END OF STEPS.
To connect the ZXMP S200 to the PSTN for communication between them:
i. Connect the RJ11 plug of the telephone line to the TRK interface on the OW board;
ii. Connect the other end of the telephone line to the user telephone interface in the PSTN.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Prerequisite
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
84 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
EMS Computer Installation To install the EMS computer
Note: A transmission network includes multiple sites but not all sites need an EMS computer. Only important sites where network monitoring is performed need an EMS computer. Generally, one EMS computer is installed in a transmission network to monitor the whole network.
1. Determine the installation position of EMS computer according to the construction design and the customer’s requirements. Usually, it is installed on the maintenance desk.
2. Clean the desk on which the EMS computer will be placed. There should be no sundries on the desk.
3. Unpack the EMS computer and place the accessories onto the maintenance desk.
4. Connect the cables and power cords of the peripherals according to the instructions.
5. After the connection, put the host and the display in place.
Note:
Make sure that the host and the display stand firmly, the cables are neatly arranged, and peripherals are connected correctly.
After the EMS computer is installed, store all the related documents and software for future use.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 85
Hardware Installation Inspection Inspecting Cabinet and Chassis
To check whether 19-inch cabinet installation and chassis installation meet the hardware installation requirements
1. After installation, check and make sure the 19-inch cabinet stands firmly and look neat and tidy.
2. In case of multiple cabinets in one row, check whether the cabinet rows are evenly spaced and the spacing between cabinets is less than 3 mm. The cabinets in the same row should be neatly aligned.
3. Check whether the 19-inch cabinet stands in such a way that either the vertical or horizontal deviation does not exceed 3 mm.
4. Check whether all fastening components on the chassis and cabinet are secured tightly.
5. Check and make sure that no components or parts get loose or damage.
6. Check and make sure the labels of the equipment are correct, complete and clear labels.
7. Check and make sure that the installation position of the ZXMP S200 in the cabinet does not influence cable outlet and maintenance.
8. Check the shells of the cabinet and chassis which should be grounded correctly and properly, and make sure the antistatic wrist straps are installed in place.
END OF STEPS.
Inspecting Cables
To check whether cable layout satisfies the cabling requirements
1. Check whether the cable specifications are correct, satisfying the running and design requirements of the equipment.
2. Check whether all cables are connected correctly with no wrong connection or missing connection.
3. Check whether cable connectors are firmly plugged in the sockets and make sure there are no missing or bent pins.
4. Check the layout and binding of cables as follows:
Purpose
Steps
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
86 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
i. Check whether cables are laid according to the specified locations. Fiber pigtails and cables, laid along the walls, are protected with protection tubes.
ii. Check whether cables are not strained tight at bending places, so that cable roots and connectors will be free from pull. The bending radius should satisfy the relevant requirements, as introduced in the section “General Requirements for Laying External Cables”.
iii. Make sure cables in the troughs and those on the cabling ladders are arranged tidily and bound into bundles. There should be no damage to the cable sheath.
iv. Make sure there is no cut or joint of the cable and there is some extra length of the cable.
v. Make sure cables laid in the same direction are bound together properly so that the bundles are smooth and tidy and there is no crisscross. The cable straps should be neatly cut with no sharp end.
vi. Make sure power cables, data cables and fiber pigtails are laid separately.
END OF STEPS.
Inspecting Labels
To check whether labels satisfy the labeling requirements
1. Check whether all the labels are clean and tidy.
2. Check and make sure that the contents and sticking positions satisfy the requirements specified in the section “Making and Sticking Labels”.
END OF STEPS.
Cleaning the Installation Site
To clean the installation site
1. Clear away any cable thrums and debris inside the cabinet, wiring trough and under the antistatic floor. The cabinet inside should be neat and has no dust.
2. Clean the cabinet shells, board panels, maintenance desks and chairs.
3. Clean the equipment room and make sure the equipment room is neat and has no dust.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
Purpose
Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 87
First Power-On Check First Power-On Check Flow
Figure 67 shows the first power-on check flow of the ZXMP S200.
F I G U R E 67 F I R S T P O W E R -ON C H E C K FL O W
End
Check installation configuration
Test primary power voltageTroubleshooting
The primary power voltage is
abnormal
Normal
Start
Power on
Check equipment status Troubleshooting
The equipment status is abnormal
Normal
Test fans
The fans runs abnormally
Normal
Troubleshooting
Flowchart
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
88 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Checking Installation and Configuration
To check whether the installation and configuration of the ZXMP S200 are correct according to installation and configuration requirements
1. Check and make sure that the chassis are installed firmly and there is no foreign object in the chassis.
2. Check the status of DIP switches on the PCB of the main board and make sure they are correctly set as follows.
NCP DIP switch (S3): Make sure not all pins of the DIP switch are set to “ON” or “OFF” at the same time.
MCU DIP switch (S4): Make sure not all pins of the DIP switch are set to “ON” or “OFF” at the same time.
Main board type DIP switch (S6): Make sure that the first pin of the DIP switch is set to “ON” position while the other three pins are set to “OFF” position, i.e. the main board is set to the type of S200V2.0 with TU12 mapping path.
3. The switches of the power supply loop and the power board (PWA/PWB/PWC) are both turned off.
Caution:
If -48 V/-60 V DC power supply is used, the-48 V/-60 V DC power/grounding cable must be properly connected, with the blue cable connecting -48 V or -60 V power terminal, and the black one connecting -48 V or -60 V ground. Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged!
If +24 V DC power supply is used, the +24 V DC power/grounding cable must be properly connected, with the red cable connecting +24 V power terminal, and the black one connecting +24 V ground.
If AC power supply is used, make sure that an additional AC voltage-regulated power supply (such as UPS) has been configured for the PWC board and Class-B lightning protector with nominal discharge current of 60 kA has been installed in the equipment room.
4. Check whether the fiber pigtails, service cables, power cables and grounding cables are all firmly connected and make sure the cable layout meets the requirements.
5. Check and make sure that all label contents are correct, clear and complete.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
Chapter 1 Equipment Installation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 89
Testing Primary Power Supply
To test the primary power supply
Note: Handle the problem promptly if any incompliance is found during primary power supply test and redo the test.
1. Make sure that the switch of the power supply loop and the power switch of the equipment are both turned off.
2. Use a multimeter to check whether there is short circuit between the positive and negative poles of the power input terminal.
3. Check whether the power input terminals are properly labeled.
4. Check whether the protection ground (PGND) is safely connected.
5. Measure the voltage of the primary power supply on the equipment side with a multimeter.
Make sure that the polarity is correct and that the voltage is within the following range:
For -48 V/-60 V DC power supply, the allowable voltage range is -72 V to -36 V;
For +24 V DC power supply, the allowable voltage range is +18 V to +36 V;
For AC power supply, the allowable voltage range is 90 V to 290 V.
END OF STEPS.
Powering On
To power on the ZXMP S200 equipment
1. Switch on the power supply loop.
2. Turn the power switch on the front panel of the power board to “I” to switch on the ZXMP S200 equipment.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
90 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Testing Fans
To check whether the fan module is running normally after the ZXMP S200 is powered on
1. Observe the fans in the fan module and check whether the fans buzz lightly and continuously.
2. If the fans run abnormally, power off the ZXMP S200 immediately and check the fans.
3. If the fans do not rotate, power off the ZXMP S200 immediately and check whether the fan cable is connected correctly or whether the fans are damaged.
END OF STEPS.
Checking Equipment Status
To check if the equipment is working normally after power on
1. Observe the indicators of boards in the ZXMP S200 equipment to check whether the equipment is running normally.
In normal case, the running indicator of PWA/PWB/PWC board (identified with “RUN) should be continuously lit in green. The RUN indicators of other boards should be flashing regularly (one time per second).
Note: Please refer to Unitrans ZXMP S200 (V2.20) SDH Based Multi-Service Node Equipment Product Descriptions for detailed introduction of indicators on the front panel of each board.
2. If the equipment does not perform self-test, check and make sure that all chips on board are inserted correctly, and the chip model, burn-in program and the version are all correct.
3. If the equipment keeps resetting again and again, please measure the power supply voltage for any abnormality.
4. Check whether there are any bent or broken pins.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
Purpose
Steps
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 91
C h a p t e r 2
Equipment Maintenance
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Basic requirements for running environment
Grounding and lightning protection requirements
Temperature and humidity requirements
Cleanness requirements
Application environment requirements
Tools and instruments required for the maintenance
Maintenance rules in equipment room
Maintenance precautions
Maintenance measures
Routine equipment maintenance operations
Routine EMS maintenance operations
Troubleshooting flow and principles
Common methods for fault location
Classification of alarm and performance messages
Typical faults and corresponding troubleshooting
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
92 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Basic Requirements for Running Requirements Overview
The ZXMP S200 is a precision electronic device. It should be installed in a proper operation environment to ensure its stable and reliable operation.
Maintenance personnel should conduct regular inspection on the running environment of the equipment and make immediate modifications and improvements if necessary, so as to guarantee the normal operation of the equipment.
This section describes the environment requirements of the ZXMP S200, including
Grounding and lightening protection requirements of the equipment room, power supply system, the ZXMP S200 equipment and other equipment in the equipment room
Temperature and humidity requirements
Cleanness requirements
Application environment requirements
Grounding and Lightning Protection Requirements
All PCBs of boards and the cover of the ZXMP S200 must be connected to the protection ground in the equipment.
If the equipment room adopts the joint grounding mode, the following requirements should be met:
The grounding resistance of the central equipment room should be no more than 1 Ω.
The grounding resistance of a far-end equipment room should be no more than 5 Ω.
If the equipment room adopts the independent grounding mode, the grounding resistances should meet the requirements listed in Table 32.
Requirements for Grounding
System in Equipment
Room
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 93
T AB L E 32 GR O U N D I N G R E S I S T AN C E R E Q U I R E M E N T S I N IN D E P E N D E N T GR O U N D I N G MO D E
Grounding Resistance Value (Ω)
AC working ground resistance ≤4
DC working ground resistance ≤4
Security protection ground resistance ≤4
Lightning protection ground resistance ≤4
Copper busbar with cross section area no less than 120 mm2 should be used as earth busbar or earth bar. Galvanized flat steel with the dimensions equal to or more than 40 mm×4 mm can also be used.
Be sure to use copper lugs, bolts and spring washers to fasten the connections between equipment grounding cables and the earth busbar or earth bars. One bolt can only be used to connect one grounding cable. Determine the joint grounding cable size and the number of screws according to the quantity of equipment’s grounding cables in the equipment room.
Table 33 lists typical power supply lightning protection classes.
T AB L E 33 TY P I C AL P O W E R S U P P L Y L I G H T N I N G P R O T E C T I O N C L AS S I F I C AT I O N
Class Parameter Location of Lightning Protection Circuit
Class B 40 kA (8 μs /20 μs) AC power distribution board/unit
Class C 20 kA (8 μs/20 μs) DC power cabinet
Class D 6000 V (combination wave)
-48 V power rectifier
The ZXMP S200 must meet the following power supply lightning protection requirements.
A central equipment room should meet the following lightning protection requirements:
AC power cables should be led into the cable vault or power room underground.
Install Class B lightning protection unit in the AC power distribution board/unit or at the entrance of it. The unit is grounded by connecting the floor earth bar through the AC power distribution board/unit.
Install Class C lightning protection unit in the DC power cabinet, being grounded by connecting the floor earth bar through the DC power cabinet.
Requirements for Grounding and Lightning Protection of
Power Supply
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
94 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Install Class D lightning protection unit in the rectifier, being grounded by connecting the floor earth bar through the rectifier and the DC power cabinet.
A far-end equipment room should meet the following lightning protection requirements:
AC power cables should be led into the far-end equipment room underground.
Connect Class B lightning protection unit to the protection grounding bar in the equipment room through the AC power distribution board/unit. Connect Class C lightning protection unit to the protection grounding bar in the equipment room through the DC power cabinet. Connect Class D lightning protection unit to the protection grounding bar in the equipment room through the rectifier and the DC power cabinet.
Connect the -48 V ground of the DC power cabinet to the working grounding bar in the equipment room. If there is no working grounding bar in the equipment room, connect it to the protection grounding bar instead. Figure 68 illustrates the connection for power supply lightning protection in a far-end equipment room.
F I G U R E 68 PO W E R S U P P L Y L I G H T N I N G PR O T E C T I O N CO N N E C T I O N I N A F AR -E N D EQ U I P M E N T R O O M
AC DC
AC Power DistributionBoard/Unit
DC Power Cabinet
Class B Class C
Protection Grounding BarWorking Grounding Bar
-48V
-48V GND
Since the AC power distribution board/unit and the DC power cabinet in the same equipment room, the distance between Class B and Class C lightning protection units should meet the following decoupling distance requirements:
When the protection grounding bar is laid independently, the distance between Class B and Class C lightning protection units should no less than 5 m.
When the protection grounding bar and the power cords are laid in parallel, the distance between Class B and Class C lightning protection units should no less than 15 m.
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 95
If the required decoupling distance can not be satisfied due to some restriction in the equipment room, additional decoupling inductance(s) should be installed before the Class C lightning protection unit by 1.5μH/m.
Bunched copper wires with cross section area no less than 35 mm2 should be used as the grounding cables of the Class B lightning protection unit (AC power distribution board/unit), and the protection grounding cables and working grounding cables of the Class C lightning protection unit (DC power cabinet), which are connected to the protection grounding bar in the equipment room. Keep the length of grounding cables as short as possible.
The requirements for the lightning protection of subrack and cabinet where the ZXMP S200 is installed are as follows:
For the ZXMP S200 installed in a cabinet, its protection grounding wire should be connected to the protection grounding busbar in the cabinet. The protection grounding wire of the cabinet should be connected to the earth busbar or earth bar (including column-head power cabinet) with bunched copper wires with cross section area no less than 16 mm2.
If the equipment uses DC power supply, its protection ground should be short circuited with the ground of DC power supply and then connected to the protection grounding busbar in the cabinet.
It is forbidden to lead the protection grounding wire of the equipment out of the cabinet and connect it to the earth busbar or earth bar (including column-head power cabinet) in the equipment room directly.
The requirements for the lightning protection of the ZXMP S200 installed on desktop or mounted on wall are as follows:
If the ZXMP S200 uses DC power supply, short circuit its protection ground with the ground of DC power supply first, and then connect it to the earth busbar or earth bar (including column-head power cabinet) in the equipment room with bunched copper wires with cross section area no less than 4 mm2.
For the wall-mounted ZXMP S200, it should be mounted on the inner wall of the equipment room. Keep the expansion screws used to fix the brackets away from reinforcing steel bars inside the wall as far as possible.
Requirements for Grounding and Lightning Protection of
the ZXMP S200
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
96 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Implement strict equipotential connections among equipment connected to the ZXMP S200, such as DC power cabinet, switch and digital distribution frame (DDF).
The protection grounds of DC power cabinet, switch and DDF should be connected to the earth busbar in the equipment room with bunched copper wires with cross section area no less than 35 mm2.
Other metal equipment and components in the equipment room, such as the monitoring unit, metal door and windows and AC power distribution unit, should be connected to the nearby earth busbar in the equipment room with bunched copper wires with appropriate cross section area.
Before being led into a central equipment room, external optical cables in the cable vault must be connected to the earth busbar through lead-in connection devices.
In a far-end equipment room, external optical cables must be connected to the protection grounding busbar or outdoor lightning protection ground through optical termination box, which is connected to the protection grounding busbar or earth network with bunched copper wires with cross section area no less than 16 mm2.
Temperature/Humidity Requirements
The ZXMP S200 should operate in the environment meeting the following temperature and humidity requirements, as listed in Table 34.
T AB L E 34 TE M P E R AT U R E A N D H U M I D I T Y R E Q U I R E M E N T S O F T H E ZXMP S200
Item Requirement
Operating temperature -5°C to +50°C
Performance-guaranteed index
10% to 95%
Relative humidity Operation-guaranteed index
5% to 95%
Cleanness Requirements
The cleanliness represents the requirement for the dust and harmful gas in the air. The equipment room where the ZXMP S200 works should meet the following cleanliness requirements.
Requirements for Grounding and Lightning Protection of
Other Equipment
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 97
There is no explosive, conductive, magnetic-conductive and corrosive dust in the equipment room.
The concentration of dust with dimension above 5 µm should be no more than 3×104 particles/m3.
There is no harmful gas which may destroy metal and insulation, such as SO2, NH3, H2S and NO2.
Table 35 lists the requirements for the concentration of harmful gas in the equipment room.
T AB L E 35 R E Q U I R E M E N T S F O R C O N C E N T R AT I O N O F H AR M F U L G AS I N E Q U I P M E N T RO O M
Concentration Harmful Gas
Average (mg/m3) Maximum (mg/m3)
SO2 <0.2 <1.5
H2S <0.006 <0.03
NO2 <0.04 <0.15
NH3 <0.05 <0.15
Cl2 <0.01 <0.3
Keep the equipment room clean, and confirm that the door and windows are properly sealed.
Application Environment Requirements
According to China national standard GB/T 4798 and the application scope of the ZXMP S200, the application environment requirements are listed in Table 36.
T AB L E 36 AP P L I C AT I O N E N V I R O N M E N T RE Q U I R E M E N T S O F T H E ZXMP S200
Application Environment Condition Class Time Limit
Storage 1K5/1Z1/1B2/1C2/1S3/1M3 180 days
Transportation 2K4P/2B2/2C2/2S3/2M3 30 days
Use 3K5/3Z2/3Z7/3B2/3C2/3S2/3M3 20 years
Note: For the meaning of the environment class in the above table, please refer to the China national standard GB/T 4798 Environmental Conditions Existing in the Application of Electric and Electronic Products, which is an equivalent standard of IEC 60721.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
98 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Maintenance Tools and Instruments Maintenance Tools and Materials
The maintenance tools are used during routine maintenance operations and events of faults. It is important to keep all the maintenance tools in equipment room.
The following lists common tools required in the equipment room for equipment maintenance.
1. Screwdrivers
One straight screwdriver and one cross screwdriver matching screws with the diameter 2 mm to 2.5 mm
One straight screwdriver and one cross screwdriver matching screws with the diameter 3 mm to 5 mm
2. Long straight screwdriver (equipment accessory)
3. Tweezers
4. Adjustable extractor
5. Diagonal pliers
6. Sharp nose pliers
7. Cable peeler
8. Scissors
9. Crimping pliers
10. Electric iron (40 W)
11. Clamping pincers
12. IC extractor
13. Antistatic wrist strap
14. Vice
15. Fiber extractor
Besides the common tools listed above, the following materials need to be prepared for equipment maintenance:
1. Anhydrous alcohol
2. Dust-free paper
3. Solder tin
4. Rosin
5. Insulating tape
Tools Required for
Maintenance
Materials Required for Maintenance
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 99
6. Nylon adhesive hook-and-loop tape
7. Cable ties
8. 2 M cables used for self-loop test
9. Fiber pigtails
10. Straight-through network cable (with length depends on actual requirement)
Note: Maintenance personnel should also carry a certain number of NCP BootROM chips and other chips on boards for equipment upgrade.
Instruments and Meters
Instruments and meters are used to check the system performance and environment status.
Table 37 lists the common instruments and meters required for the equipment maintenance.
T AB L E 37 I N S T R U M E N T S AN D M E T E R S R E Q U I R E D F O R EQ U I P M E N T M AI N T E N AN C E
Instrument/Meter Description
Thermometer/
Hygrometer
Both of them must be prepared in an equipment room to monitor the operating environment of equipment.
Digital multimeter Used to measure the voltage of equipment’s power supply during the commissioning
Optical power meter Used to measure input and output optical power
BER tester Used to test bit errors during system debugging
SDH synthetic analyzer
It acts as a light source to provide single-wavelength light for ZXMP S200 equipment during the equipment debugging and system debugging. It can also be used as an optical power meter and BER tester.
Optical attenuator
Appropriate attenuators are added between fiber pigtails and optical interfaces to adjust optical power and make it meet the related indexes of optical interfaces.
Portable PC
Sometimes, it is necessary to temporarily access the network element management system (EMS) for maintenance at a site. In this case, a portable PC equipped with a Modem card and a network card and corresponding straight-through or crossover network cable is needed.
Instruments and Meters
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
100 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Instrument/Meter Description
Chip burner A chip burner may be needed while upgrading equipment, which is used to burn the new version program into a chip.
Caution: All the instruments and meters should be checked and calibrated before use, to ensure their accuracy and good conditions.
Note: As instruments and computer are expensive, it is acceptable to equip the instruments and meters listed in the above table only at one or several major sites according to the scale of the transmission network, which can be shared by other sites.
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 101
Equipment Room Maintenance Rules A complete set of effective maintenance rules should be developed to ensure that the equipment room environment satisfies the equipment running requirements for better equipment maintenance. All the maintenance personnel should observe these rules. This section lists the work rules and shift rules of the equipment room for users’ reference.
Work Rules
The following lists the work rules which maintenance personnel should observe during maintenance.
Keep the equipment room tidy and clean. Change shoes at entry. Keep the floor clean, keep the equipment dust-free, and arrange the equipment properly.
Ensure that the instruments are precise, the tools are ready and the materials are complete.
Do not smoke, eat, play games, or talk loudly in the equipment room.
Do not put personal articles around in the equipment room, and do not do anything irrelevant to the job.
Do not bring inflammable or explosive articles into the equipment room. Unauthorized entry into the equipment room is not allowed.
Wear an antistatic wrist strap before operating the equipment.
Take care of public properties in the equipment room.
Do not disclose any confidential information.
Keep proper records and statistics of the original data. Make sure that the technical documents and original records are authentic and complete.
The person on duty must be dutiful. Handle and report any major fault and accident promptly.
There should be leaders who conduct regular checks for the equipment room, and make continuous improvement.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
102 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Shift Rules
The shift rules are very important for uninterrupted communications and should be strictly followed by each maintenance person.
The persons on duty should perform shift handover seriously. The responsibilities and formalities should be clearly defined to ensure smooth shift.
The person on the previous shift should, before going off duty, provide clear information about his/her shift to the person on the next shift; the person on the next shift should conduct careful checks before taking over the duty.
Check and make sure during the shift that: the equipment running status, the state of the tools and instruments are clear; various drawings and records are complete.
The person on the previous shift should stay on duty until the person on the next shift arrives and can only leave after the shift is completed.
After proper shift, the persons of both shifts should sign on the work log as a written record, indicating that the equipment has been handed over to the next shift.
If fault occurs during shift, the persons of both shifts should be responsible for the troubleshooting.
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 103
Maintenance Precautions Precautions for Equipment Maintenance
Before the maintenance operations on the ZXMP S200, maintenance personnel should learn not only the basic precautions for maintaining common communication equipment, but also the special precautions for maintaining transmission equipment, to ensure the safety of both human and equipment.
The following gives the precautions for the maintenance of the ZXMP S200 equipment:
Be sure to strictly follow the power-on procedures.
Note: The power-on procedures are as follows.
i. Check and make sure that hardware installation and cable layout of the equipment are correct.
ii. Check and make sure the input power of the equipment satisfies relative requirements and there is no short circuit inside the equipment.
iii. Switch on the power supply loop and then turn the power switch on the front panel of the power board to “I” to power on the equipment.
iv. Observe the fans and indicators of the equipment and judge whether the equipment is running normally.
Be sure to strictly follow the power-off procedures.
Note: The power-off procedures are as follows.
i. Turn the power switch on the front panel of the power board to “O” to power off the equipment.
ii. Shut down the power supply loop.
Warning: Powering off the equipment will make the equipment exit running state, resulting in traffic interruption. Since the transmission equipment is very important in the network, power-off operation should be avoided once the equipment is in service.
Take proper antistatic measures in equipment maintenance to avoid any damage to the equipment.
As human body may generate static electromagnetic field that persists for long, maintenance personnel should wear an antistatic wrist strap and make sure the other end of it is well grounded before touching the equipment, in order to prevent human static electricity from damaging sensitive
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
104 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
components and devices. The boards not in use should be kept in the antistatic bags.
Pay attention to the damp-proof handling of the equipment and boards.
The environment temperature and humidity effect must be taken into consideration for the storage of equipment and boards. Usually, put some desiccant in the antistatic bags of equipment and boards, to keep the bag inside dry. When the equipment is moved from a colder and drier place to a hotter and damper place, wait at least 30 minutes before unpacking it. Otherwise, moisture may condense on the equipment surface and damage the components.
Be sure to cover the unused optical interfaces of the boards with the dustproof caps. This not only protects the maintenance persons’ eyes during their casual direct viewing on optical interfaces, but also protects optical interfaces against dust. Once dust enters the optical interface, it may affect the output optical power of the optical transmit interface and the receiving sensitivity of the optical receive interface.
Be sure to cover fiber pigtail connectors with dust caps once a fiber pigtail is unused.
Do not look straight into optical interfaces on optical boards to protect your eyes from being burnt by laser.
Use dust-free paper dipped in absolute alcohol to clean fiber pigtail connectors carefully. Do not use ordinary industrial alcohol, medical alcohol or water.
Precautions for EMS Precautions
NE Management System (EMS) is very important in optical transmission system, which is used to monitor and manage NEs in the network. Therefore, the following precautions should be considered while maintaining the EMS.
Do not exit the EMS when the system is running normally. Exiting the EMS will make the EMS unable to monitor the equipment, and destroy the continuity of equipment monitoring; although it will not interrupt services.
Assign different EMS login accounts for different users, allocate the related operation authority to them, and periodically change the EMS password, to ensure its security.
Do not use the EMS to dispatch services during traffic peak, because it will impose great influence on the equipment upon presence of any error. Dispatch services when traffic is minimum.
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 105
Do not install or disconnect any power cable where the power is ON. The power cable, when contacting a conductor, may cause sparks or electric arc, which may cause a fire or damage your eyes. Do shut down power supply before connecting or disconnecting a power cable.
Backup data timely after a service dispatch to ensure a quick service recovery in case of fault.
Do not play games on the EMS computer, nor copy any irrelevant files or software to it. Kill virus regularly on the EMS computer to protect it from virus.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
106 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Maintenance Measures Overview
Maintenance personnel can locate and clear faults in the system through proper maintenance measures.
For the ZXMP S200 equipment is managed by the network element management system (EMS) ZXONM E300 developed by ZTE CORPORATION, the ZXMP S200 maintenance measures can be classified into equipment maintenance and EMS maintenance.
The equipment maintenance measures refer to operations on the equipment hardware, such as unplugging/plugging fiber pigtails and hardware loopback.
The EMS maintenance measures refer to operations on the equipment through the EMS, such as board reset and laser control.
Caution: Be sure to cancel the conducted maintenance operations in time once the objective of test and diagnosis is reached, so that the equipment operation will not be affected.
Plugging/Unplugging a Fiber Pigtail
Fiber pigtails have various connectors at both ends. The fiber pigtails for connecting the ZXMP S200 equipment use LC/PC connectors.
Perform the following steps to plug a fiber pigtail with LC/PC connectors:
1. Check and make sure the fiber optic connectors at both ends of the fiber pigtail are correct.
2. Hold the pigtail plug with your thumb and index finger, and align the spring piece on the connector with concave trough of optical interface adapter.
3. Push the fiber pigtail inward by applying moderate force.
Note: Be careful and avoid damaging the ceramic inner pipe of the optical adaptor or the connector’s end surface.
4. Clamp it tightly once the pigtail connector is completely plugged in.
END OF STEPS.
Information
Plugging a Fiber Pigtail
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 107
Perform the following steps to unplug a fiber pigtail with LC/PC connectors:
1. Hold the fiber pigtail connector by your thumb and index finger or clamp the connector with an extractor.
2. Press down the spring piece on the connector.
3. Pull out the connector with moderate force along the connector’s direction.
Laser: During operation, do not stare at the optical interface to prevent your eyes from being hurt.
END OF STEPS.
Loopback Test
Loopback is the operation of sending information from a transmit interface of an NE, and receiving the information from the receive interface of that NE. It is a usual measure for detecting the fault of transmission channel.
The functions of loopback test are as follows:
Locate the faulty point of an NE level by level in case of separate communication links
Detect the working status of nodes and transmission lines.
Locate the faulty NE and even the faulty board quickly and accurately
Facilitates the equipment commissioning and debugging
Warning: The loopback will result in traffic interruption. Be cautious to use it!
The loopback is classified into hardware loopback and software loopback.
Hardware loopback is to loop a signal by connecting its receive port and transmit port. In terms of the signal flow direction, the hardware loopback orients towards the equipment side. So the hardware loopback is also called hardware self-loop. The self-loop of electrical signals and optical signals is similar.
The following content takes the optical interface hardware self-loop as an example.
Unplugging a Fiber Pigtail
Overview
Hardware Loopback
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
108 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
To implement the optical interface hardware self-loop, connect the optical transmit interface and optical receive interface with a fiber pigtail to loop the signal.
The optical interface hardware self-loop is divided into local self-loop and cross self-loop.
Local self-loop: the optical receive port (R) and the optical transmit port (T) in the same optical direction are connected with a fiber pigtail.
Cross self-loop: the optical receive/transmit (R/T) interface in an optical direction are connected to the optical transmit/ receive (T/R) interface in another optical direction with fiber pigtails.
Warning: While performing the hardware loop-back with a fiber pigtail, an optical attenuator must be added before the optical receive interface (R) to prevent excessive optical power from damaging the optical interface. After the loopback test, remember to remove the optical attenuator and restore the former optical line connection.
Software loopback refers to the loopback implemented by means of the EMS software. On the EMS, not only the optical/electrical signal self-loop which is equivalent to the hardware loopback, but also the line loopback or single channel loopback can be implemented.
Menu path in ZXONM E300: Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Set Loopback
In terms of looping direction, the software loopback is divided into the line-side loopback and terminal-side loopback.
For an optical line board processing STM-N optical signals, the loopback is defined as follows:
Line-side loopback: the signal is looped from the line board to an optical line interface
Terminal-side loopback: the signal is looped from the line board to the inside of equipment, as illustrated in Figure 69.
F I G U R E 69 SO F T W AR E LO O P B AC K D I R E C T I O N D E F I N I T I O N F O R OP T I C AL L I N E B O AR D
Line-side loopback Terminal-sideloopback
Toward theinside of
equipment
Optical Line Board
Optical lineinterface
Software Loopback
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 109
Note: For the ZXMP S200, no special optical line board is available. However, its main board integrates all functions of an optical line board.
For a tributary board processing PDH signals or Ethernet signals, the loopback is defined as follows:
Line-side loopback: the signal is looped from the tributary board to the inside of the equipment
Terminal-side loopback: the signal is looped from the tributary board to a tributary interface, as illustrated in Figure 70.
F I G U R E 70 SO F T W AR E LO O P B AC K D I R E C T I O N D E F I N I T I O N F O R TR I B U T AR Y B O AR D
Line-sideloopback
Terminal-side loopback
Toward theinside of
equipment
Tributaryinterface
Tributary Board
Types of loopback channels
Software loopback can control the receiving and transmitting connection of a channel through the EMS.
For the ZXMP S200, the channels which can be looped include administrative unit AU-4 and tributary unit VC-12.
Table 38 shows the relations between loopback points and boards in the ZXMP S200.
T AB L E 38 LO O P B AC K P O I N T S AN D C O R R E S P O N D I N G BO AR D S O F T H E ZXMP S200
Loopback Point
Loopback Direction
Board Type
(ID on the EMS)
AU4 Line side OL1, OL4
AU4 Terminal side 4#OL1 [Note]
Port Line side 5#OL1, 6#OL1, OL4 [Note]
Port Terminal side OL1, OL4
VC3 Line side
Terminal side EIE3
VC12 Line side ET1, V35B, SDB
VC12 Terminal side ET1, SDB
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
110 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Loopback Point
Loopback Direction
Board Type
(ID on the EMS)
VC11 Line side
Terminal side TT1 (TU12)
V35 Line side
Terminal side V35B
STU-C Line side
Terminal side SDB
Ethernet user port
Line side
Terminal side TFE
VCG (EOS) port
Line side TFE
Note: 4#, 5# and 6# indicate slot 4, slot 5 and slot 6 on the EMS respectively. For example, “4#OL1” indicates the OL1 board installed in slot 4.
Warning:
While perform the loopback operation, try to avoid the effect on traffic.
Avoid using the AU loopback if the fault can be located via tributary unit loopback.
Optical Power Test
Before testing optical power, pay attention to the following precautions:
Check and make sure that the connectors of fiber pigtail are clean, and the connecting devices of the fiber optic adapter on the optical board panel and the optical power meter are well coupled.
Measure the attenuation amount of the fiber pigtail and make sure that this fiber pigtail has good transmission performance. For optical boards using single-mode and multi-mode optical interfaces, use different fiber pigtails for test accordingly.
If necessary, the attenuation amount of the optic connector and the testing fiber pigtail can be considered known, serving to amend the mean optical launched power read from the optical power meter. For higher test accuracy, take the average value of multiple test results, and then amend it with the attenuation values of the optical connector and the testing fiber.
Test Precautions
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 111
Perform the following steps to test the optical launched power of an optical interface:
1. Set the received optical wavelength of optical power meter as closer to the transmitted optical wavelength of optical board as possible.
2. Connect one end of the fiber pigtail to the optical transmit port (T) of the optical board and the other end to the input port of the optical power meter, as illustrated in Figure 71.
F I G U R E 71 TE S T I N G T H E OP T I C AL L AU N C H E D P O W E R
R
T
Optical power meterOptical interface
Fiber pigtail
3. Then read the stable optical power value displayed on the optical power meter, which is the optical launched power of the optical interface.
END OF STEPS.
Perform the following steps to test the optical received power of an optical interface:
1. Set the received optical wavelength of optical power meter as closer to the optical wavelength to be tested as possible.
2. Unplug the fiber pigtail connected to the optical receive port (R) on the board to be tested, and connect it to the input interface of the optical power meter.
3. Read the stable optical power value displayed on the optical power meter, which is the optical received power of the optical interface.
END OF STEPS.
Testing Optical Launched
Power
Testing Optical Received
Power
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
112 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Bit Error Test
Bit error test is used to check the frame bits status. There are two methods for bit error test of the ZXMP S200:
Test with an instrument
Test through the EMS software
Testing bit errors with an instrument is a common method used for system performance test during commissioning and channel performance test in case of channel problems during operation.
The test with an instrument may be implemented online or offline. The test point for bit errors is the service access point that the equipment provides for users, such as 2 M and 34 M physical interfaces.
Online Bit Error Test
The following introduces the bit error test by connecting an electrical interface with a BER tester and an optical interface with an SDH analyzer respectively for your reference.
To test a service channel with a BER tester, perform the following steps:
i. Select a service channel in use.
ii. Connect the receiving end of the BER tester to the monitoring connector (located on the head of T-type cable) on the DDF, to which the electrical interface corresponding to the service channel is connected.
Figure 72 illustrates the connection between the BER tester and the electrical interface.
F I G U R E 72 CO N N E C T I O N F O R ON L I N E B I T E R R O R TE S T (E L E C T R I C AL I N T E R F AC E )
Transmissionconnecting terminal
Switchconnecting terminal
T R T R T R T R
Panel of DDF
Connector of the channelunder test on DDF
BER T
ester
R
T
T-type cable head
Note: T – Transmitting; R - Receiving
Description
Testing with an Instrument
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 113
iii. Perform online monitoring of the channel for any bit error.
iv. Read the BER tester.
END OF STEPS.
To test an optical channel with an SDH analyzer, perform the following steps:
i. Select an optical channel in use.
ii. Connect the SDH analyzer to the optical channel as shown in Figure 73.
F I G U R E 73 CO N N E C T I O N F O R ON L I N E B I T E R R O R TE S T (OP T I C AL I N T E R F AC E )
Local NE
Opticalinterface
R
T
Opposite NE
Opticalinterface
T
R
SDH analyzer
R T
iii. Perform online monitoring of the optical channel for any bit error.
iv. Read the SDH analyzer.
Caution: During online bit error test of optical channel, the connection of SDH analyzer will cause traffic interruption. Be cautious to perform the online bit error test for optical channels.
END OF STEPS.
Offline Bit Error Test
The method of offline bit error test by using an instrument is similar to that online test.
Figure 74 and Figure 75 illustrates the connection of electrical interface and optical interface with an instrument for offline bit error test respectively.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
114 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 74 CO N N E C T I O N F O R OF F L I N E B I T E R R O R TE S T (E L E C T R I C AL I N T E R F AC E )
SD
H a
naly
zer
T
R
Local NE
R
T
Tributaryside
Lineside
Opposite NE
R
T
Tributaryside
Lineside
Self-lo
oped
F I G U R E 75 CO N N E C T I O N F O R OF F L I N E B I T E R R O R TE S T (OP T I C AL I N T E R F AC E )
SD
H a
naly
zer
T
R
Local NE
R
T
Service-side
opticalboard
Line-side
opticalboard
Opposite NE
R
T
Service-side
opticalboard
Line-side
opticalboard
Self-lo
oped
The following introduces the offline bit error test steps:
i. Select the service channel to be tested, find the PDH/SDH interface in the local site and the PDH/SDH interface in the opposite site corresponding to this channel.
ii. Perform line-side loopback for the PDH/SDH interface in the opposite site on the EMS. Or perform the hardware loopback on the DDF/ODF.
iii. Connect the SDH analyzer to the PDH/SDH interface in the local site, and then monitor the channel for any bit error.
iv. Read the SDH analyzer.
Caution: Make sure the instrument is well grounded and avoid turning on/off other electrical appliances during the test.
END OF STEPS.
On the EMS, two commands are available to check the status of channels: “Insert Error Code” and “Channel Detect”.
Insert Error Code
Bit errors can be inserted into a channel forcibly via the EMS software. After successful insertion of bit error, corresponding bit error performance event should be queried at the opposite end. This operation can be used to check the status of a channel.
Testing Through EMS
Software
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 115
Menu path in ZXONM E300: Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Insert Error Code
The relations among the insertion point of error bits, bit error types and applicable boards of the ZXMP S200 are described in Table 39.
T AB L E 39 R E L AT I O N S AM O N G I N S E R T I O N P O I N T , B I T ER R O R TY P E AN D AP P L I C AB L E B O AR D S O F T H E ZXMP S200
Insertion Point
Bit Error Type Board ID
(As specified in the EMS ZXONM E300)
VC11 V5 bit error TT1 (TU12)
VC12 V5 bit error ET1, TFE, SE, V35B, SDB
VC3 B3 bit error ETT3, TFE, SE, EIE3
VC4 B3 bit error TFE, SE
MS B2 bit error OL1, OL4
RS B1 bit error OL1, OL4
The manually inserted B2/B3/V5 bit errors have no influence on traffic. They cannot be detected by instruments, but can be queried from the EMS computer. If the insertion point is higher-order VC3 path virtual container configured with bidirectional services, equivalent number of remote bit errors should be detected on the board where the insertion point is located.
Channel Detect
Use the “Channel Detect” command on the EMS to test the performance of channels.
Menu path in ZXONM E300: Maintenance -> Test -> Channel Detect
Caution: The channel detection will cause traffic interruption. Be cautious to use this command for channel test.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
116 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Inserting Alarm to Judge Switching Status
Inserting alarms is a method to monitor the system with manually generated alarms. For the ZXMP S200, we can also insert an AIS alarm through the EMS to judge whether the ring network switching is normal.
Menu Path in the ZXONM E300:
Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Insert Alarm
Table 40 describes the relations between alarm insertion points and applicable boards in the ZXONM E300.
T AB L E 40 R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N AL AR M I N S E R T I O N P O I N T S AN D AP P L I C AB L E B O AR D S
Insertion Point Board ID (As specified in the EMS ZXONM E300)
MS OL1, OL4
AU4-nc OL4
AU4 OL1, OL4
TU12 ET1, V35B
TU11 ET1
When the alarm is successfully inserted, the corresponding channel at the receiving end should report the AIS alarm. If the insertion point is TU3/TU12 configured with bidirectional service, the insertion point will also report the RDI alarm.
When the alarm is inserted successfully, if the traffic is not interrupted in a protected network, it indicates that the switching is normal. If the traffic is interrupted, it indicates that the switching is abnormal. The line and related boards should be checked.
Introduction
Result Analysis
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 117
Setting Alarm Standby Mode
Alarm standby is used to process alarms reported by interfaces which do not carry traffic yet in the network.
Menu Path in the ZXONM E300:
Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Standby
The ZXMP S200 supports two alarm standby modes:
Inversion
In this mode, the alarm status is reverse to the actual alarm status. For example, suppose the alarm standby mode of a port on the electrical tributary board is set to inversion. When some traffic is connected to it, it will report the “loss of input signal” alarm.
Auto Report
In this mode, the port will not report alarm when it is not connected with any traffic. It will automatically restore to report alarm normally until the port is connected to some traffic.
Protection Switching Configuration
The ZXMP S200 supports the following protection modes:
Multiplex Section (MS) protection
Two-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring (with extra traffic or without extra traffic)
Four-fiber 1+1 MS protection chain
Four-fiber 1:1 MS protection chain (with extra traffic or without extra traffic)
Sub-Network Connection (SNC) Protection
VC12 level SNC (I) protection
VC3 level SNC (I) protection
VC4 level SNC (I) protection
VC4 level SNC (N) protection
Note: When SNC protection is enabled, the working sub-network will be replaced by the protection sub-network once the working sub-network connection is interrupted or the performance deteriorates to the specified threshold.
Protection Modes
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
118 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The protection switching modes of the ZXMP S200 can be set on the EMS.
Menu Path in the ZXONM E300:
Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Protection Switch
Four protection switching modes are optional. The priority levels of the four modes are as follows:
Lock > Force Switch > Manual Switch > Exercise
The meaning of each protection switching mode is described below:
Lock
If this mode is selected, the switching to the protection section/channel will be refused. It can be seemed as that the protection switching function is locked.
Force Switch
If this mode is set for a section/channel, the system will switch the section/channel to the working or protection section/channel no matter whether it is faulty, unless another switching instruction with equal or higher priority takes effect.
Manual Switch
If this mode is set for a section/channel, the system will switch the section/channel to the working or protection section/channel unless another switching instruction with equal or higher priority takes effect or the section/channel is faulty.
Exercise
If this mode is set, the system only processes the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) protocol but not perform protection switching.
APS Start/Stop/Reset Settings
If Multiplex Section (MS) protection is enabled in a ring network, the EMS can be used to perform the APS operation for the MS protection group.
Menu Path in the ZXONM E300:
Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> MS Protection Group APS operation
Configuration in EMS
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 119
The APS operation includes the start, stop and reset of APS protocol, as introduced below.
Start APS
After starting APS, the system begins processing APS protocol of equipment normally and the automatic protection switching of MSP group is enabled.
Note: The APS flag should be started for an MSP ring on the EMS after it has been configured.
Stop APS
After stopping APS, the system stops to process the APS protocol and the data before the stop will be kept. For example, if a section has been switched to protection section in a site, it continuous to connect the protection section and the system will no longer process newly-collected data.
Reset APS
Once the equipment accepts the APS reset instruction, it will clear all current APS data and rewrite initialization data. Then the equipment enters normal working status and wait for collecting new data for APS.
Note: After the equipment executes the APS reset command, the APS function will be enabled directly.
Setting Laser Status
The lasers of the ZXMP S200 equipment can be turned on or shut down through the EMS.
Menu Path in the ZXONM E300:
Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Set Laser Status and ALS
When a laser is turned on, corresponding optical interface launches light.
When a laser is shut down, the optical launched power of corresponding optical interface is zero, that is, the optical interface outputs no light. Usually, the purpose of shutting down lasers is to stop the light output of unconnected optical interfaces so as to avoid damaging eyes of operators during the maintenance of optical path.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
120 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Using a Multimeter to Test Service Cable
During construction and maintenance, it is always needed to test service cables so as to judge if there are any cold joint, missed joint, short circuit, or wrong cable connection on DDFs.
1. Use a short conducting wire or tweezers to short circuit the signal core wire and shielded layer at one end of the cable.
2. Measure the resistance between the signal core wire and shielded layer with a multimeter.
The test result should be 0.
3. Then remove short conducting wire or tweezers to disconnect the short circuit.
4. Measure the resistance at the other end of the cable.
The test result should be infinite.
END OF STEPS.
Through the test results, we can determine that the tested ends belong to the same cable, and the cable is normal.
If the test results are different from the values mentioned above, it indicates that the cable is short-circuited or broken somewhere. Maybe the cable connector has cold solder joint, overlooked solder joint or short circuit, or these two ends do not belong to the same cable.
Resetting Boards
The purpose of resetting a board is to make the processor of the board recover and work normally again when any fault occurs.
Caution: A board should not be reset unless you confirm that the board functions are affected due to processor fault.
Boards of the ZXMP S200 can be reset in two ways: hardware reset and software reset.
On the panel of the main board, there is a reset button marked with “N.RST”. Press this button to reset the NCP of the main board if necessary. After that, the main board will perform power-on self-test.
Purpose
Steps
Analysis
Purpose
Hardware Reset
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 121
The boards of ZXMP S200 can be reset through the EMS (ZXONM E300).
Menu Path in the ZXONM E300:
Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Reset Card
The ZXONM E300 supports two kinds of software reset: hard reset and soft reset. They have different implementation approaches.
Hard reset: It is to reset all chips of a specific board, which is implemented by means of hard reset connecting lines on the board.
Soft reset: It is to reset application programs of a specific board. Soft reset has two levels: CPU level and CPU+IC level.
The CPU level soft reset only reset the application programs without resetting service chips and downloading logic programs, while the CPU+IC level soft reset all chips and download logic programs again.
Note: The CPU level soft reset has the same effect as that of the hard reset. These two kinds of reset modes are used in different applications. If the board hangs without response, only hard reset can be used to try to recover the board.
Software Reset
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
122 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Routine Equipment Maintenance Operations Routine equipment maintenance operations include:
Checking audio alarm function
Observing indicators of boards
Checking fan module
Checking and cleaning dustproof module
Checking Ratproof bag
Checking lightning protection and grounding
Checking Audio Alarm Function
Audio alarms attract the maintenance personnel attention easily. This maintenance operation is to make sure that the equipment can emit sound in case of any alarm.
1. Generate an alarm manually.
For example, set the alarm standby mode of an unconnected optical interface to “Inversion” on the EMS, and then access traffic to this optical interface.
Note: For how to set the alarm standby mode, please refer to the section “Setting Alarm Standby Mode”.
2. Check whether the equipment emits alarm sound.
END OF STEPS.
If no sound is heard upon the presence of equipment alarm,
1. Check whether the main board is in the permanent ring trip status.
2. If yes, press the ring trip button on the main board again to cancel the status.
3. Check audio alarm again to find whether any alarm sound can be heard.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
Fault Handling
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 123
Observing Indicators of Boards
From the indicators status, maintenance person can judge whether there is any alarm, and can distinguish the severity of alarm if there is one.
This maintenance operation is to obtain further information about the running status of the equipment by observing the indicators of the boards
Observe the indicators of all boards installed in the ZXMP S200 chassis.
When the equipment runs normally, the green indicator of PWA/PWB/PWC board should be continuously lit and the green indicators of other boards should be flashing regularly (one time per second).
END OF STEPS.
When some indicator is lit in red, inform the network management operator in the central site immediately, who should check alarm and performance messages of the equipment and boards on the EMS.
The detailed information of ZXMP S200 indicator status is introduced in Table 41 through Table 48.
T AB L E 41 D E S C R I P T I O N O F I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O N T H E M AI N B O AR D
Indicator ID Status
Running indicator of NCP unit
RUN Green indicator
Flashes regularly (one time per second) when the NCP runs normally
Alarm indicator of NCP unit
MAJ/ MIN
Bi-color indicator (red-yellow).
OFF when the main board runs normally
ON in red when critical alarms occur
ON in yellow when major/minor alarms occur
Indicator of optical receive interface
R
Green indicator
ON when corresponding optical receive interface receives optical signal
OFF in case of signal loss
Purpose
Steps
Fault Handling
Reference
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
124 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Indicator ID Status
Indicator of optical transmit interface
T
Green indicator
ON when the laser of the optical transmit interface is turned on.
OFF when the laser of the optical transmit interface is shut down.
Indicator of RS232 interface/120 Ω BITS interface
M-ALM/ M-RUN
On the lower part of the RS232 interface are two green indicators, one on the left and the other on the right.
Left Indicator (M-ALM): alarm indicator of the main board.
ON when any unit of the main board (except the NCP unit), the TFEx4 or TFEx4B board reports an alarm.
OFF when the alarm is cleared or shielded.
Right Indicator (M-RUN): clock status indicator.
Flashing in the period of four seconds indicates internal clock or hold-on mode.
Flashing in the period of one second indicates normal locking of line clock or external clock.
Flashing in the period of two seconds indicates that the clock is working in the free-run mode.
Flashing two times per second indicates that the clock is working in the pull-in or tracking mode.
Indicator of Qx interface
LA/SP
On the lower part of the Qx interface are two green indicators, one on the left and the other on the right.
Left Indicator (LA): connection indicator
ON when the interface is correctly connected.
OFF when the interface is not connected.
Right Indicator (SP): speed indicator
ON when the data transmission speed is 100 Mbit/s.
OFF when the data transmission speed is 10 Mbit/s.
Note: Since the interface speed is forced to be 10 Mbit/s, the right indicator is always OFF.
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 125
Indicator ID Status
Indicator of Fast Ethernet electrical interface
-
On the upper part of each FE electrical interface are two green indicators, one on the left and the other on the right.
Left Indicator (LINK/ACTIVE): connection indicator
ON when the interface is correctly connected.
OFF when the interface is not connected.
Right Indicator: speed indicator
ON when the data transmission speed is 100 Mbit/s.
OFF when the data transmission speed is 10 Mbit/s.
T AB L E 42 D E S C R I P T I O N O F I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O N T H E PWA/PWB B O AR D
Indicator ID Status
Power indicator of A path A
Green indicator
ON: A path has input power supply.
OFF: A path output end of the power board has not been connected, or the power switch is turned off.
Power indicator of B path B
Green indicator
ON: B path has input power supply.
OFF: B path output end of the power board has not been connected, or the power switch is turned off.
Running indicator
RUN Green indicator
ON: The PWA board runs normally.
Alarm indicator ALM
Red indicator
OFF: The PWA board runs normally
ON: Some alarm occurs in the power board
T AB L E 43 D E S C R I P T I O N O F I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O N PWC B O AR D
Indicator ID Status
Running indicator
RUN Green indicator
Flashing regularly (one time per second): The PWC board runs normally.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
126 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Indicator ID Status
Alarm indicator ALM
Red indicator
OFF: The PWC board runs normally.
ON: Some alarm occurs in the PWC board.
T AB L E 44 D E S C R I P T I O N O F I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O N T H E TFE X 4 B O AR D
Indicator Location Description
LINK/ACK indicator
Left top corner of Ethernet interface
Yellow indicator
ON: The Ethernet interface is connected, that is, in the LINK status.
OFF: The Ethernet interface is not connected.
Flashing: Data packets are being received or transmitted through the Ethernet interface.
Interface speed indicator
Right top corner of Ethernet interface
Green indicator
ON: The data transmission speed of the Ethernet interface is 100 Mbit/s.
OFF: The data transmission speed of the Ethernet interface is 10 Mbit/s.
Note: If the TFEx4 board reports an alarm, the M_ALM indicator on the main board will be continuously lit.
T AB L E 45 D E S C R I P T I O N O F I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O N T H E TFE X 4B B O AR D
Indicator Status
Indicator of Ethernet optical interface (LA)
Green indicator
ON: The Ethernet interface is connected, that is, the interface is in the LINK status.
OFF: The Ethernet interface is not connected.
Flashing: Data packets are being received or transmitted through corresponding Ethernet optical interface.
Note: If the TFEx4B board reports an alarm, the M_ALM indicator on the main board will be continuously lit.
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 127
T AB L E 46 D E S C R I P T I O N O F I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O N T H E SEC B O AR D
Indicator Location/ID
Description
LINK/ACK indicator
Left top corner of Ethernet interface
Green indicator
ON: The Ethernet interface is connected, that is, in the LINK status.
OFF: The Ethernet interface is not connected.
Flashing: Data packets are being received or transmitted through the Ethernet interface.
Interface speed indicator
Right top corner of Ethernet interface
Green indicator
ON: The data transmission speed of corresponding Ethernet interface is up to 100 Mbit/s after self-negotiation.
OFF: The data transmission speed of corresponding Ethernet interface is 10 Mbit/s.
Running indicator
RUN Green indicator
Flashing regularly (one time per second): The SEC board runs normally.
Alarm indicator
ALM
Red indicator
OFF: The SEC board runs normally.
ON: Some alarm occurs in the SEC board.
T AB L E 47 D E S C R I P T I O N O F I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O N T H E SDB B O AR D
Indicator Location/ID
Description
Interface alarm indicator
Left top corner of SHDSL port
Yellow indicator
ON: Some alarm occurs in the interface.
OFF: No alarm occurs in the interface.
Line connection indicator
Right top corner of SHDSL port
Green indicator
ON: The interface is connected.
OFF: The interface is not connected.
Running indicator
RUN Green indicator
Flashing regularly (one time per second): The SBD board runs normally.
Alarm indicator
ALM
Red indicator
OFF: The SBD board runs normally.
ON: Some alarm occurs in the SBD board.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
128 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
T AB L E 48 D E S C R I P T I O N O F I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O N T H E OT H E R B O AR D S
Indicator ID Status
Running indicator
RUN Green indicator
Flashing regularly: The board runs normally.
Alarm indicator ALM
Red indicator
OFF: The board runs normally.
ON: Some alarm occurs in the board.
Note: For the detailed description of the indicators, such as their position on boards and identifiers, please refer to Unitrans ZXMP S200 (V2.20) SDH Based Multi-Service Node Equipment Product Descriptions.
Checking the Fan Module
Check whether the fans run stably at even rotation speeds without abnormal sound while the equipment is running, so as to ensure good heat dissipation and long-term normal running of the equipment
Note: It is necessary to check the working status of fans periodically.
Observe the running of fans in the fan module.
END OF STEPS.
If some fan is faulty, do troubleshooting according to actual situation as follows:
1. If the fan rotates at irregular speed, check whether there is any foreign substance existing in the fan module, and whether the fan is damaged.
2. If the fan does not run, check whether the fan is damaged.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
Fault Handling
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 129
Checking and Cleaning the Dustproof Module
Check and make sure that the dustproof module is clean and there is no much accumulated dust on the air filter in the dustproof module, so as to avoid equipment damage and heat dissipation deterioration caused by dust block.
Note: It is recommended to clean the air filter every 15 days.
1. Pull out the dustproof module along the direction marked on the left side of the chassis.
2. Check the air filter in it.
3. Clean the air filter when too much accumulated dust is found on it.
4. Scrub the air filter with clean water.
5. Install it to the dustproof module after being dried.
6. Mount the dustproof module back to the chassis.
END OF STEPS.
Checking Ratproof Bag
Check and make sure that the ratproof bags are intact, preventing rats and insects from damaging the equipment
Check the ratproof bags on the top and bottom of the cabinet
END OF STEPS.
If any damage of ratproof bags is found, replace the bags with new ones in time.
Purpose
Steps
Purpose
Steps
Fault Handling
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
130 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Checking Lightning Protection and Grounding
Check and make sure that the lightning protection and grounding connection of the equipment and equipment room meet the related requirement, so as to prevent thunder from damaging equipment, especially in thunder season, such as spring and autumn.
Note: It is recommended to check the grounding and lightning protection system periodically.
1. Check whether the grounding system is normal.
2. Check whether all grounding resistances meet the specified requirements.
3. Check whether the lightning protection units are normal.
END OF STEPS.
If any incompliance is found, maintain the grounding and lightning protection facilities in time according to the grounding and lightning protection requirements.
Please refer to the section “General Requirements for Laying External Cables” for more information of specific requirements.
Purpose
Steps
Fault Handling
Related Information
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 131
Routine EMS Maintenance Operations The EMS (ZXONM E300) is an important tool in routine maintenance of the equipment. To ensure the secure and reliable operation of the equipment, maintenance personnel working in the office where the EMS is located should check the running status of equipment on the EMS every day.
This section introduces the following EMS operations commonly used during routine maintenance.
Managing users of the EMS
Checking connections between NEs and the EMS
Monitoring network topology
Checking communication status of boards
Monitoring alarm messages
Monitoring performance messages
Querying system configuration
Managing NCP database
Querying NCP security log
Printing reports
Backing up data
Restoring data
Note: For the description of more EMS operations, please refer to related operation manuals of the EMS ZXONM E300.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
132 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Managing Users
In order to prevent illegal login to the EMS software and ensure normal running of equipment and service security, it is necessary to change the login password of the EMS users periodically, and assign proper authorities to the EMS operators.
Note: The EMS software provides four levels of users:
Administrator
Maintainer
Operator
Monitor
Each level of user has specific operation authorities.
1. Assign unique username, password and management objects for each EMS operator, and assign different user levels according to the specific operation authorities of each user.
Access path in the ZXONM E300: Security -> User Management
2. Use the assigned user name and password to log in to the EMS. The operator should be able to log in to the EMS with the assigned user name and have corresponding operation authorities.
3. Change the login password of the EMS operators periodically.
Caution: Since the administrator possesses all the operation authorities, if it logs in to the EMS and performs any improper operation, it may cause severe consequences. Therefore, in routine maintenance, it is not recommended for the user to log in to the EMS as an administrator. Instead, a system monitor user should be created, and used to log in to the EMS for routine maintenance.
END OF STEPS.
1. If the EMS operators have wrong operation authorities or cannot change the password, they should request the administrator to check the user configuration data or reset the user authorities and password.
2. In case of EMS connection failure, troubleshoot it according to the instructions in the section “EMS Connection Fault”.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
Fault Handling
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 133
Checking the Connection Between NE and EMS
Check the connection between the equipment (NE) and the EMS in order to make sure that the EMS software can reflect the running conditions of the equipment timely and accurately, and to ensure that the EMS software performs effective monitoring on the equipment.
1. Start up the ZXONM E300 client software on the EMS computer and log in to the EMS server. The “Manager” computer icon on the left navigation pane of the client operation window should be shown in blue.
2. Check the NE icon on the client operation window and make sure that this NE icon is not gray.
Note: When some alarm(s) occur in the NE, the NE icon in the client operation window is displayed in a specific color depending on the highest severity of alarms. Table 49 lists the default relationship between the icon color, alarm severity and NE status.
T AB L E 49 R E L AT I O N S H I P BE T W E E N NE IC O N C O L O R AN D AL AR M S E V E R I T Y
NE Status Alarm Color of NE Icon
NE is offline or not connected to the EMS
- Gray
No alarm Green
Critical alarm Red
Major alarm Orange
Minor alarm Yellow
Warning Purple
Acknowledged alarm Green with purple border
NE is connected to the EMS
Uncertain alarm Blue
END OF STEPS.
If the NE icon is gray, troubleshoot the EMS connection fault according to the instructions in the section “EMS Connection Fault”.
Purpose
Steps
Fault Handling
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
134 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Monitoring Topology
The ZXONM E300 EMS software provides audible and visual alarm functions. The user can monitor the running status of the current subnet and NEs through the navigation tree, topology map, NE icon, card management dialog box and the NE installation window; and can judge the alarm level through the sound or color given with the alarm.
Note: The EMS software can only monitor and manage the NEs who are in normal communication with the EMS host.
1. Log in to the EMS server and open the ZXONM E300 client operation window.
2. Observe the NE icon in the client operation window. The NE icon should be green or other color but not gray.
If the NE icon is gray, it indicates that the NE is offline or the connection between it and the EMS is interrupted.
If the NE icon is green, it indicates that the NE communicates with the EMS well without any alarm.
If the NE icon is in other color, it indicates that the NE communicates with the EMS well and reports some alarm.
3. Check the status of boards in the card management dialog box. There shouldn’t be any alarm indicator on the NE icon.
4. Check the optical connection between NEs. If the connection is normal, the link between NEs should be a real line but not a dashed one, which means that optical the connection has been broken.
END OF STEPS.
1. If the EMS connection is faulty, troubleshoot it according to the instructions in the section “EMS Connection Fault”.
2. If some alarm occurs, query the alarm details via the current alarm monitoring dialog box or monitoring window and troubleshoot it according to the alarm information.
3. If the optical connection is abnormal, check corresponding optical cables or fiber pigtails.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
Fault Handling
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 135
Checking the Communication Status of Boards
This maintenance operation is to ensure that the NE can communicate with the EMS normally.
Note: It is recommended to perform the communication status of boards with the EMS periodically.
1. In the client operation window of the ZXONM E300, click the menu Maintenance -> Test -> Communication Test to pop up the Communication Test dialog box.
2. Select the board to be tested and then click Apply button to start the communication test. A success message should be shown in the Test Result box if the board can communicate with the EMS normally.
END OF STEPS.
If the communication test fails, check whether the board under test supports the communication test function. If yes, check further and find out whether the board is faulty.
Monitoring Alarm Messages
In the ZXONM E300 EMS software, users can monitor the alarm messages of an NE; thus keep aware of the current working status of the NE, and detect/handle the alarm message of the NE in time.
Note: The EMS software can only monitor and manage the NEs who are in normal communication with the EMS host.
1. In the client operation window of the ZXONM E300, open the monitoring window to monitor the alarm messages of all NEs in real time. There should be no current alarm.
2. In the client operation window of the ZXONM E300, click Alarm -> Current Alarm or Alarm -> History Alarm to query the current or history alarm messages of the selected NEs. There should be no unacknowledged history alarm information.
END OF STEPS.
If alarm information can not be queried, it may be caused by EMS connection fault. Troubleshoot it according to the instructions introduced in the section “EMS Connection Fault”.
Purpose
Steps
Fault Handling
Purpose
Steps
Fault Handling
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
136 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Monitoring Performance Messages
In the ZXONM E300 EMS software, the user can monitor the performance messages of an NE; thus keep aware of the current service performance of the NE, and detect/handle the performance messages of the NE in time.
1. In the client operation window of the ZXONM E300, select Performance -> Current Performance to query the current 15-minute and 24-hour performance values of the boards.
2. In the client operation window of the EMS software, select Performance -> History Performance to query the history 15-minute and 24-hour performance values of the boards.
3. Check the result and make sure that
No B1, B2, B3 or PJC performance events are reported.
The analog performance values of optical boards are within the allowed range.
END OF STEPS.
1. If large amounts of CV performance events are detected at few 2 M ports, check whether the related cables and grounding cables are well connected.
For the methods of handling performance messages, please refer to the section “Typical Performance Event and Handling” in this chapter.
2. If bit errors are found, handle the problem according to the description in the section “Bit Error Fault” in this chapter.
Querying System Configuration
In the ZXONM E300 EMS software, the user can query the configuration information of an NE. The result of this query is the network configuration in the EMS software, which may not be the actual configuration of the NE.
If the queried configuration is not consistent with the actual one, it is necessary to upload the actual configuration to the EMS.
1. In the ZXONM E300 client operation window, select the NE icon in the topology and then select Device Config -> NE Config -> NE Property to check the properties of NEs in the pop up dialog box.
Purpose
Steps
Fault Handling
Purpose
Steps
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 137
2. Double click the NE to pop up the Card Management dialog box and check the board configuration information in it.
3. Select the NE in the client operation window and select Device Config -> Common Management -> Link Management to query the connection information of the NE in the pop up dialog box.
4. Select the NE in the client operation window and select Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config to query the service configuration of the NE.
5. Select the NE in the client operation window and select Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Protection Switch to query the protection switch information of the NE in the pop up dialog box. Check the result and make sure there is no protection switching event.
END OF STEPS.
1. If the current service meets the user requirements, the network configuration data should be corrected to comply with the actual networking.
2. If the current service does not meet the user requirements, the network configuration data should be corrected according to user requirements.
3. If protection switching event occurs, handle it according to the instructions introduced in the section “Typical Performance Event and Handling”.
END OF STEPS.
Managing NCP Database
To obtain the actual configuration and current working status of the NE, the user need to perform some operations periodically such as backing up the NE data, uploading the data and comparing the data in the EMS database with that in the NE database.
1. In the client operation window, select the NE and click System -> NCP Data Management -> DB Upload and Compare.
2. Execute the upload comparing command, to upload the data of a selected NE manually.
3. Check the result and make sure the current network configuration and NE configuration are consistent with the actual networking.
Fault Handling
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
138 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Note: In the ZXONM E300 client operation window, you can select the NE, click System -> NCP Data Management -> Auto Upload and Compare, and enable the function of periodically uploading and comparing NE data. Then the EMS will automatically issue an upload comparing command according to the period set by the operator.
END OF STEPS.
If the configuration data in the NCP database of the NE is inconsistent with that saved on the EMS, handle it as follows:
1. If the configuration data in the NCP database satisfies the user’s requirements, select System -> NCP Data Management -> DB Upload and Save to load and save the configuration data in NCP database to the EMS.
2. If the database of the EMS satisfies the user’s requirements, select System -> NCP Data Management -> DB Download to load the data to the NCP.
END OF STEPS.
Querying NCP Security Log
The ZXONM E300 EMS software can record all the operations performed by the user into the NCP security log. It is one of the security guarantees.
Query the user operation log periodically; and check whether there is any illegal access and any improper operation affecting the system running.
1. In the ZXONM E300 client operation window, select Security -> NCP Security Log to access the log dialog box.
2. Check the result and make sure there is no illegal login and no user operations affecting system operation or service functions.
END OF STEPS.
When any illegal user or operation is found, use the user management function of the EMS software to check the user identity and the authority settings, and change the user password in time.
Fault Handling
Purpose
Steps
Fault Handling
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 139
Printing Reports
Print out the configuration reports of an NE, covering the contents of NE information, performance and alarm messages. The reports can be taken as operation/maintenance records and the basis of network analysis.
Before print report, you must start the report server first.
In the computer where the ZXONM E300 client is installed in Windows operating system, select Start -> Programs -> ZXONM E300 -> Report Server to start the report server.
1. In the ZXONM E300 client operation window, select the NE and click Report -> Config Report to enter corresponding dialog box.
2. Select the report type to be printed as needed.
3. Click Preview button to preview the report or click Print button to print it out directly.
END OF STEPS.
If the report can not be printed, check whether the report server has been started.
Backing Up Data
In the ZXONM E300 EMS software, database backup is primarily used to copy and save the data of the Manager database. In the network operation & maintenance, it is necessary to backup the system data often so that the network data can be recovered quickly in case of network fault or EMS data loss.
Note: It is recommended to save the backup data in a mobile storage device lest backup loss in case of hard disk fault of the EMS host.
Use the ZXONM E300 to backup data (not including historical data):
1. In the client operation window, select System -> System Data Management -> DB Backup or Restore to access the DB Backup/Restore dialog box.
2. Select the Backup radio button in the dialog box.
3. Set the saving path of backup file and input the file name.
4. Click the Backup DB button to start backing up data.
Purpose
Prerequisite
Steps
Fault Handling
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
140 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
5. After successful backup, a folder with the same name of the file will be generated in the specified directory for the backup file, in which backup data is restored.
END OF STEPS.
If the backup file does not exist in the specified directory, try to backup the data again.
Restoring Data
To restore original data backuped in the database in case of EMS upgrade, network fault or EMS data loss.
Note: It is recommended to backup current data in the EMS before restoring original data because the restored data will cover the current data in the EMS.
Use the ZXONM E300 to restore data (not including historical data):
1. In the client operation window, select System -> System Data Management -> DB Backup or Restore to access the DB Backup/Restore dialog box.
2. Select the Restore radio button in the dialog box.
3. Set the saving path of backup file and input the file name.
4. Click the Restore DB button to start restoring data.
END OF STEPS.
If the version of original backup data is higher than that of the current EMS, it is recommended to upgrade the EMS.
Fault Handling
Purpose
Steps
Fault Handling
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 141
Troubleshooting Flow The troubleshooting flow chart is as shown in Figure 76.
F I G U R E 76 TR O U B L E S H O O T I N G FL O W
Flowchart
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
142 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Basic Principles of Troubleshooting In handling the equipment faults, the maintenance staff should follow these basic principles: observe first, then query, think, and take action finally.
After arriving at the site, the maintenance personnel should first observe the fault phenomena carefully including the faulty point, alarm reason, severity level and damage level. Only by fully considering fault reasons of the equipment, can one feel the essence of problem.
Put questions to onsite operators after observing fault phenomena. Check whether there is any direct cause of the fault, such as data modification, file deletion, circuit board replacement, power supply fault or lightning.
After observing the symptoms and querying the operators, the maintenance person can analyze by using his own knowledge. Locate the fault, find the faulty point, and work out the fault cause.
After locating the faulty point through above given three steps, the maintenance staff or technician can remove the fault by performing proper fault eradication procedures, e.g., by modifying the configuration data or by replacing the board.
Observing
Querying
Thinking
Taking Action
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 143
Basic Considerations for Fault Location Common Fault Causes
The common fault causes include:
Engineering problems
External causes
Improper operations
Equipment interconnection problems
Equipment problems
Engineering problem refers to substandard or inferior construction of project, which may results in equipment faults. Some engineering problems can be revealed during the construction of project but some cannot be revealed, until the equipment has operated for a certain time. These problems are latent risks for the equipment.
The product engineering specifications are usually summed up according to the product’s features and some practical experiences. Therefore, in order to prevent such problems, installation and maintenance personnel should strictly observe the engineering specifications while performing construction and installation and carrying out the single-site or entire-network debugging and test.
External causes refer to the environment and equipment factors instead of the equipment itself, which results in equipment fault.
Power failure, such as equipment power failure and too low supply voltage.
Switch failure
Fiber fault, such as fiber performance deterioration, high loss, fiber cut-off, loose contact of fiber connector.
Cable fault, such as relay cable dropped or broken due to loose contact of cable connectors.
The equipment is improperly grounded.
The equipment is placed in unsuitable environment.
Improper operations refer to inappropriate operations performed by maintenance staff due to lack of in-depth understanding of equipment, which results in equipment fault.
Improper operation is the most common phenomena while carrying out equipment maintenance, especially in network reconstruction, upgrading, and expansion, where the old and
Engineering Problems
External Causes
Improper Operations
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
144 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
new devices are mixed or old and new versions are mixed. The maintenance staff is usually unaware of the difference between old and new devices or between the old and new versions and tends to trigger off a fault.
Transmission equipment is capable of accessing various optical signals and connecting other complicated equipment. Different services present different requirements for transmission channel performance. The interconnection failure may be caused by equipment faults.
Possible causes for problems in equipment interconnection are as follows:
Incorrect cable connections
Equipment grounding problems
Clock asynchronization between transmission and switch networks
Different definition of overheads in SDH frames
Equipment problems refer to the faults caused by the transmission equipment itself, including equipment damage and inferior cooperation of PCBs. After running for a long time, the PCBs may be damaged due to aging factor, which ultimately result in equipment damage.
The characteristics of equipment problems are: the equipment has been in use for a long time and has been running normally before the fault occurs; and the fault only occurs at certain points/PCBs, or the fault occurs because of external causes.
Principles for Fault Location
Since the transmission equipment covers the sites which are located far away from each other, it becomes critical to locate the fault to the specific site accurately. After finding the faulty site, concentrate on its eradication/troubleshooting.
General principles of locating faults:
1. Check the external factors first, such as the fiber connection, switch fault and power supply failure. After that, consider the transmission equipment faults.
2. Try to find out the faulty site first, and then locate the fault to the board.
3. Optical line board failure always leads to tributary board failure. Therefore, consider optical line first and then tributary. While analyzing alarms, consider the higher level alarms first, and then analyze the lower level alarms.
Equipment Interconnection
Problems
Equipment Problems
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 145
Common Methods for Fault Location The common methods of fault locating include:
Observing & analysis method
Test method
Unplugging/plugging method
Replacement method
Configuration data analysis method
Reconfiguration method
Instrument test method
Experience method
Observation & Analysis Method
When the system gets faulty, alarm information will appear on the equipment and at the EMS. Observing the status of alarm indicator light on equipment will help to find the fault timely.
When a fault arises, the EMS will record abundant alarm events and performance data. Analyze the information, combine it with the overheads in SDH frames and the alarming principle of SDH, to determine fault type and fault location primarily.
Note: While collecting the alarm and performance information through the EMS, be sure to set the current running time of NEs synchronous to the EMS time. Deviation of time setting will result in incorrect or delayed collection of alarm and performance information of NEs.
Test Method
When the networking, service and fault information are complicated or when equipment faces unidentifiable faults without reporting any clear alarm or performance information, use the maintenance functions provided by the EMS to test the faulty point and fault type. The following content takes loopback operation as an example.
Before performing loopback operation, you need to determine the NE, board, path and direction of loopback. Since the paths concurrently faulty are usually correlated to some extent. While selecting the loopback path, select one faulty NE, one faulty
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
146 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
traffic channel, and then perform the loopback operation in each direction of selected traffic channel for analyzing.
When performing the loopback operation, break up the business process of the faulty traffic channel, draw a service route map, set out the service source/sink, NEs that the service passes through, paths and timeslots occupied, and then perform loopback in each segment to locate the faulty NE. After locating the fault to the NE, perform loopback at the line side and tributary side to locate the possible faulty board. Further, confirm the faulty board with other methods, and replace it.
The loopback operation does not require any in-depth analysis of alarms and performance. It is a common and effective method for locating the fault point. However, it may affect the services.
Unplugging/Plugging Method
After locating fault to a specific board, maintenance personnel can unplug the board and external interface connector. Plug them back to check loose contacts or abnormal board status.
Caution: Strictly comply with the specifications while plugging/unplugging the board to avoid board damage or other problems caused by improper operations.
Replacement Method
Replacement method means replacing suspected faulty piece of equipment with a new one such as a segment of cable, a board or an equipment, to troubleshoot the fault. The replacement method is applicable to the following circumstances:
1. Check for the problems of external transmission equipment, which may be: fibers, trunk cables, switches and power supply devices.
Example: 2 M interface of a tributary board raises the performance event “CV count out of limit” or “Loss of 2 M signal” alarm.
Analysis: It may be caused by switch or trunk fault.
Solution: Switch the faulty channel to a normal one. If the alarm transfers after replacement, it indicates that external trunk cable or switch is faulty. If the fault persists even after replacement, it may be a transmission fault.
2. Check for the problem on board after locating the fault to a specific site.
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 147
Example: If an alarm occurs because of faulty optical line board, the receiving fiber and transmitting fiber may be connected inversely, and fault can be removed just by correcting the fiber connection.
3. Resolve the power and grounding problems
The replacement method is simple and demands less for maintenance staff. It is more practical but demands availability of spare parts and accessories.
Configuration Data Analysis Method
Due to change of equipment configuration or improper operation of maintenance staff, the equipment configuration data may be damaged or changed, which will result in faults. In this case, after locating the fault of distant NE site, query the current configuration data and user operation log of equipment to analyze the fault.
By configuration data analysis method we can find and analyze causes of faults after locating the faulty NE. However, this method takes relatively longer time and is more demanding. This method is applicable to the experienced maintenance staff that has good familiarity with the equipment.
Reconfiguration Method
The reconfiguration method is used to locate fault by modifying the equipment configuration. It is applicable to checking configuration error after locating fault to a specific site. The modifiable configurations include timeslot, slot and board parameters.
Caution: Before modifying the equipment configuration, back up the original configuration and keep a detailed record of operations being performed for convenience of fault investigation and data recovery.
The following introduces some applications of reconfiguration method:
A typical application of reconfiguration method is to resolve the pointer justification problem. To locate the pointer justification problem, change the clock source configuration and clock extraction direction.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
148 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
If you suspect that a tributary board or some of its paths are faulty, configure the timeslot to another path or another tributary board. If you suspect that a slot on the backplane is faulty, check it by modifying the slot configuration.
In the upgrading, expansion and reconstruction, if you suspect error in new configuration data, deliver the previous configuration data for check up.
The reconfiguration method is complicated and demands more for maintenance staff. Therefore, it is only used when the spares are short and need to recover the services temporarily, or to tackle the pointer justification problem. It is not recommended in ordinary circumstances.
Instrument Test Method
Instrument test method refers to test the working parameters of equipment by means of instruments. It is mostly used for checking the external problems of transmission equipment and problems of connecting with other equipment.
The following introduces some applications of conducting the instrument test:
Use a multimeter to test whether the supply voltage is high or low.
If the transmission equipment cannot be connected with other equipment, it is suspected that the equipment grounding is improper.
Use a multimeter to measure the voltage between the transmitting signal ground and the receiving signal ground. If the voltage value is higher than 500 mV, it can be concluded the grounding of equipment is improper.
If the transmission equipment cannot be interconnected with other equipment, it is suspected that the interface signal is not compatible.
Use a signal analyzer to observe whether the frame signal is normal, whether the overhead bytes are normal, whether any abnormal alarm occurs, so as to find out the cause of the fault.
This method features high accuracy, but it requires highly accurate instruments and demands more for maintenance personnel.
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 149
Experience Method
At some special occasions (such as transient power supply failure, low voltage or external severe electro-magnetic interference), the equipment board gets into abnormal working status (service interruption or ECC communication interruption). Corresponding alarms may be generated or not. The equipment configuration data is completely normal. Experience tells us that in such cases, we can troubleshoot the fault and recover effectively in time by resetting board, restarting the equipment, and then delivering the configuration data again.
The experience method is unable to find the real causes of faults. Therefore, it is not recommended to use this method unless the fault is emergent.
When the maintenance person encounters a fault difficult to be located, he/she should request for technical support from the nearest service office and try to troubleshoot the fault and eliminate the latent risks with the help of ZTE’s technical support engineers.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
150 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Classification of Alarm Messages In case of a fault, there usually are a great number of alarms of different types and different levels associated with the equipment and the EMS. A higher-level alarm will usually result in the lower-level alarms. Therefore, all the alarms must be categorized if a fault occurs. First handle the high-level alarm, and then observe whether the low-level ones disappear. If they do not disappear, handle them accordingly.
In SDH system, the alarm severity levels are (from high to low): alarms of communication interruption class > alarms of communication bit error class > Regenerator Section (RS) alarms > Multiplex Section (MS) alarms > Higher-order path alarms > Lower-order path alarms.
Table 50 lists the detection point, name and corresponding severity of alarms in the ZXMP S200.
T AB L E 50 AL AR M S AN D C O R R E S P O N D I N G S E V E R I T Y LE V E L
Detection Point Alarm Name Severity
Loss of 155 M optical received signal Critical
Loss of 622 M optical received signal Critical
Loss of 2 M electrical signal Critical Physical layer
Coding violation (CV) count over-threshold
Warning
Loss of frame (LOF) Critical
Unavailable second (UAS) Major
B1 UAS count over-threshold Major
Out of frame (OOF) Critical
Out-of-frame second (OFS) Major
RS signal deterioration Minor
B1 errored second (ES) out of limit Major
RS layer (electrical)
B1 background block error (BBE) out of limit
Major
MS alarm indication signal (MS_AIS) Minor
UAS Major
MS remote defect indication (MS_RDI)
Minor
B2 UAS count over-threshold Major
B2 far-end UAS (FEUAS) count over-threshold
Major
MS layer (electrical)
MS signal deterioration Minor
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 151
Detection Point Alarm Name Severity
B2 bit error count over-threshold Major
B2 FESES count over-threshold Major
B2 ES count over-threshold Major
B2 FEES count over-threshold Major
B2 BBE count over-threshold Major
B2 FEBBE count over-threshold Major
AU-4 path alarm indication signal (AIS) Major
UAS Major
Loss of AU-4 pointer Critical
Remote defect indication (RDI) Minor
B3 UAS count over-threshold Major
B3 FEUAS count over-threshold Major
Loss of multi-frame Critical
VC-4 higher-order path signal deterioration
Minor
B3 FESES count over-threshold Major
B3 ES count over-threshold Major
B3 FEES count over-threshold Major
B3 BBE count over-threshold Major
B3 FEBBE count over-threshold Major
VC-4 higher-order path unloaded Critical
VC-4 higher-order path trace identifier mismatch (TIM)
Critical
VC-4 signal identifier mismatch Critical
VC-4 higher-order path payload mismatch
Critical
AU-4 positive pointer justification (PJC+) over-threshold
Critical
AU-4 negative pointer justification (PJC-) over-threshold
Critical
Higher-order path layer (electrical AU-4)
AU-4 protection switching event Minor
TU-3 path alarm indication signal (AIS) Major
UAS Major
Loss of TU-3 pointer Critical
Remote defect indication (RDI) Minor
B3 UAS count over-threshold Major
B3 FEUAS count over-threshold Major
Higher-order path layer (electrical TU-3)
Loss of multi-frame Critical
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
152 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Detection Point Alarm Name Severity
VC-3 higher-order path signal deterioration
Minor
B3 FESES count over-threshold Major
B3 ES count over-threshold Major
B3 FEES count over-threshold Major
B3 BBE count over-threshold Major
B3 FEBBE count over-threshold Major
VC-3 higher-order path unloaded Major
VC-3 higher-order path TIM Critical
VC-3 signal identifier mismatch Critical
VC-3 higher-order path payload mismatch
Critical
TU-3 positive pointer justification (PJC+) over-threshold
Critical
TU-3 negative pointer justification (PJC-) over-threshold
Critical
TU-3 protection switching event Minor
TU-12 path alarm indication signal (AIS) Major
UAS Major
Loss of TU-12 pointer Critical
Remote defect indication (RDI) Minor
V5 UAS count over-threshold Major
V5 FEUAS count over-threshold Major
V5 SES count over-threshold Major
V5 FESES count over-threshold Major
V5 ES count over-threshold Major
V5 FEES count over-threshold Major
V5 BBE count over-threshold Major
V5 FEBBE count over-threshold Major
TU-12 positive pointer justification (PJC+) over-threshold
Major
TU-12 negative pointer justification (PJC-) over-threshold
Major
Lower-order physical layer (electrical TU-12)
TU-12 protection switching event Minor
Loss of timing input Critical Synchronous clock Loss of timing output Critical
Power supply fault Critical Equipment
Card dismount Critical
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 153
Classification of Performance Messages The performance information classification of ZXMP S200 by detection point is shown in Table 51.
T AB L E 51 C L AS S I F I C AT I O N O F P E R F O R M AN C E I N F O R M AT I O N
Detection Point Performance Information
CV Coding violation PDH 2 M physical interface SFC Slip frame count
PDH 34 M physical interface
CV Coding violation
PDH 45 M physical interface
CV Coding violation
B1 BBE B1 background block error
B1 ES B1 errored second
B1 SES B1 severely errored second
B1 UAS B1 unavailable second
Regenerator section (RS)
OFS B1 out-of-frame second
B2 BBE B2 background block error
B2 ES B2 errored second
B2 SES B2 severely errored second
B2 UAS B2 unavailable second
B2 FEBBE B2 far end background block error
B2 FEES B2 far end errored second
B2 FESES B2 far end severely errored second
B2 FEUAS B2 far end unavailable second
MS-PSD MS protection switching duration
Multiplex section (MS)
MS-PSC MS protection switching count
V5 BBE V5 background block error
V5 ES V5 errored second
V5 SES V5 severely errored second
V5 UAS V5 unavailable second
V5 FEBBE V5 far end background block error
V5 FEES V5 far end errored second
Lower-order VC-12 path
V5 FESES V5 far end severely errored second
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
154 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Detection Point Performance Information
V5 FEUAS V5 far end unavailable second
B3 BBE B3 background block error
B3 ES B3 errored second
B3 SES B3 severely errored second
B3 UAS B3 unavailable second
B3 FEBBE B3 far end background block error
B3 FEES B3 far end errored second
B3 FESES B3 far end severely errored second
Higher-order VC-3/VC-4 path
B3 FEUAS B3 far end unavailable second
AU4 PJC+ AU-4 positive pointer justification count Administrative unit
AUG AU4 PJC-
AU-4 negative pointer justification count
TU3 PJC+ TU-3 positive pointer justification count Tributary unit
TUG-3 TU3 PJC-
TU-3 negative pointer justification count
TU12 PJC+ TU-12 positive pointer justification count Tributary unit
TU-12 TU12 PJC-
TU-12 negative pointer justification count
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 155
Typical Troubleshooting Overview
The ZXMP S200 may come across some typical faults which are:
Communication fault
Communication fault generally refers to fault accompanying with path interruption or bit errors. Generally, a communication fault locates at both the switch side and transmission side.
Service interruption
BER fault
Clock synchronization fault
EMS connection fault
Fan fault
Equipment interconnection fault
Note: The faults, expect communication faults, described in this section are supposed to occur on the transmission side.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
156 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Communication Fault
The faults of transmission equipment or switch equipment may result in communication services interruption or a large number of bit errors.
Figure 77 shows the flowchart of troubleshooting a communication fault.
F I G U R E 77 TR O U B L E S H O O T I N G F L O W F O R C O M M U N I C AT I O N F AU L T
1. Once a communication fault occurs, enable the standby channel to ensure the normal operation of the existing communication services.
2. Locate the fault point, determining whether it is a transmission side fault or a switch side fault. If the transmission line passes multiple maintenance units, coordinate with them for locating fault.
Note: Test method, especially the loopback operation, is recommended to locate a communication fault.
Perform hardware loopback on related DDFs or software loopback for transmission equipment on the EMS. At the same time, connect a BER tester to check signals in the channel under test.
If software loopback is used, choose which kind of loopback should be used, tributary loopback or AU loopback, terminal-side loopback or line-side loopback.
3. If the fault is located at the switch side, coordinate with the switch maintenance team to process the fault. If the fault is located at the transmission side, classify the fault according to the flow as shown in Figure 78.
Causes
Troubleshooting
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 157
F I G U R E 78 FAU L T C AT E G O R Y D E T E R M I N AT I O N FL O W
4. After identifying the fault class, process the fault according to its troubleshooting procedure.
END OF STEPS.
Service Interruption Fault
The cause of a service interruption fault may be:
External cause: power failure, fiber or cable failure
Improper operation: Optical channel/tributary is wrongly looped, or configuration data is improperly modified or deleted.
Equipment cause: Some board fails or the performance of some board deteriorates
1. Connect a BER tester to the transmitting and receiving ports of a tributary in the faulty channel at the local NE. Using the test method to perform loopback level by level so as to locate the faulty NE.
2. Observe the indicators of the equipment and analysis their status. If both the red indicator and the green indicator of a board are blacked out, while the status of other boards’ indicators is normal, it can be judged that this board fails or has fault. Replace it with a spare board.
3. Analyze alarm and performance messages on the EMS. Locate the faulty board according to related alarms and performances. Replace the faulty board with a spare board.
Note: Step 2 and Step 3 can be carried out together by combining the plugging/unplugging method and replacement method.
END OF STEPS.
Causes
Troubleshooting
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
158 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
While performing the loopback during the troubleshooting of service interruption fault, it is recommended to follow the principles below according to the type of loopback:
Higher-order path and administrative unit (AU) loopback
Perform the loopback operations in the order below:
i. Terminal-side loopback for the faulty AU in the faulty optical direction at the local NE;
ii. Line-side loopback for the faulty AU in the near-end optical path at the adjacent NE,
iii. Terminal-side loopback for the faulty AU in the far-end optical path at the adjacent NE;
iv. Line-side loopback for the faulty AU in the near-end optical path at the sub-adjacent NE,
v. Terminal-side loopback for the faulty AU in the far-end optical path at the sub-adjacent NE,
…
vi. Line-side loopback for the faulty AU in the near-end optical path at the end NE,
vii. Terminal-side loopback for the faulty AU in the far-end optical path at the end NE.
Lower-order path loopback
Reconfigure the straight-through timeslots in the tributary at the local NE into dropping from the tributary at the adjacent NE, sub-adjacent NE…, and the end NE in order. Then perform the loopback in such order:
i. At the adjacent NE, reconfigure the straight-through timeslot corresponding to the faulty tributary of the local NE in the optical channel as a timeslot to be dropped to a tributary. Then perform line-side loopback for the tributary at the adjacent NE to check whether the fault is located between the local NE and the adjacent NE.
ii. If the path between the local NE and the adjacent NE is normal, cancel the configuration modification at the adjacent NE and reconfigure the straight-through timeslot as that to be dropped to a tributary at the sub-adjacent NE instead. Then perform line-side loopback for the tributary at the sub-adjacent NE to check whether the fault is located between the adjacent NE and the sub-adjacent NE.
…
iii. Reconfigure the straight-through timeslot as a timeslot to be dropped to a tributary at the end NE. Then perform line-side loopback for the tributary at the end NE to check whether the fault is located between the end NE and the NE before it.
Reference
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 159
The level-by-level loopback is as shown in Figure 79.
F I G U R E 79 LO O P B AC K LE V E L B Y LE V E L
An NE does not receive a service signal sent to it. And “LOS” (loss of signal) alarm is reported on the EMS.
Analyze and handle the fault as follows:
1. Check whether the corresponding fiber is connected to wrong interface. Correct it if any wrong connection is found.
2. Check the optical received power of corresponding optical interface of the NE.
If the optical power is abnormal, try another optical interface and observe whether the LOS alarm disappears.
Note: Overload optical received power may lead to loss of signal or signal deterioration. Therefore, additional optical attenuators should be equipped in the optical line between two sites close to each other so as to avoid too high optical received power.
3. Check the optical launched and received power of the upstream site. If the optical power is abnormal, try other optical interfaces and observe whether the LOS alarm disappears.
4. If the alarm still exists after the above inspections and correcting actions, follow the service interruption fault troubleshooting procedure to perform self-loop test, so as to locate the fault point and troubleshoot the fault.
END OF STEPS.
An NE does not receive a service sent to it, but no alarm occurs.
Analyze and handle the fault as follows:
1. Check whether loopback is performed between sites with the service failure.
2. If loopback exists, cancel the loopback and connect optical interfaces properly. Then check whether the NE receives the service.
3. If the loopback does not exist or the NE does not receive the service after cancelling the loopback, follow the service
Typical Fault 1
Typical Fault 2
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
160 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
interruption fault troubleshooting procedure to perform self-loop test on the optical interface, so as to locate the fault point.
4. After finding the fault point, we can determine primarily that the fault is caused by optical interface failure, because an optical interface can neither detect its own fault nor report alarms when it can not receive optical signals.
5. Check the optical received/launched power of optical interface and find which optical interface is faulty.
END OF STEPS.
The optical power of an optical interface is normal, but the service is interrupted. The MS_AIS alarm is reported at the receiving NE, and the MS_RDI alarm is reported at the transmitting NE. Loss of multiplex sections occurs even when performing self-loop.
Analyze and handle the fault as follows:
1. From the fault symptom, it can be judged that the optical board launched optical power normally but does not perform scrambling for optical signal.
2. Try resetting the NE and find whether the fault disappears.
END OF STEPS.
An NE does not receive 2 M services sent to it
Analyze and handle the fault as follows:
1. Find how many 2 M services can not be received. If the quantity is large, the optical channel may have faults.
2. If only one or a few 2 M services fails, check whether the timeslots are configured correctly. Re-download correct timeslot configuration data to the tributary board on the EMS. If the tributary still has no signal, reset the NE or the tributary board. No alarm will occur if there is no other hardware problem.
3. If the services can not be received after timeslot reconfiguration, perform terminal-side loopback for 2 M tributary, and connect a BER tester.
If the 2 M electrical signal from the BER tester is lost and the alarm does not disappear, it can be judged the fault is caused by: the 2 M interface is faulty, 2 M cable is broken, or the coaxial connector on the distribution frame is loose welded. In this case, replace the 2 M interface or cable, or weld the coaxial connector again.
If the alarm of the BER tester disappears, the problem results from the equipment side. In this case, replace the board.
Typical Fault 3
Typical Fault 4
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 161
4. If the fault point is the 2 M interface connecting to other vendor’s equipment, the cause may be: the earth potential of the abutting equipment and the transmission equipment is different, that is, potential difference exists between them. To eliminate the potential difference, adopt one of the following methods:
Check the earth network and make the earth potentials of transmission equipment and its abutting equipment keep consistent.
Ground the transmitting end of 2 M signal from the transmission equipment and abutting equipment but do not ground the receiving end.
Connect a capacitance (0.1 μ-0.5 μ) serially to the 2 M cable between the transmission equipment and the abutting equipment.
END OF STEPS.
No 2 M service can be received. And there are no alarm and performance reported on the EMS. There is no bit error while using a BER tester to test the equipment offline.
Analyze and handle the fault as follows:
The main cause for this fault may be: ODF is not grounded or the transmission equipment does not share ground with the switch, which results in a significant voltage drop.
To solve this problem, connect the grounding wire well or share the ground properly.
END OF STEPS.
Typical Fault 5
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
162 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Bit Error Fault
The cause of a bit error fault may be:
External cause: the optical fiber connector is not clean or is not correctly connected; the optical fiber performance deteriorates with excessive loss; the equipment is grounded improperly; there is a strong interference source nearby; the equipment works in a high temperature environment without proper heat dissipation.
Equipment cause: poor clock synchronization performance, board failure or deteriorated performance
Bytes which may report bit error include B1, B2, B3 and V5 byte. Their performance severity levels are: B1 > B2 > B3 > V5.
For the performance events reported on the EMS, the higher level performance events should be handled first. After that, handle the lower level performance events if they are still reported after the higher level performance events have been handled.
In normal cases, the performance value collected at any board by the EMS should be zero.
When an NE reports a bit error fault, perform the following steps to locate the fault point:
1. Query the performance of the faulty NE on the EMS. If B1/B2 performance events exist on the EMS, it indicates that the optical channel is faulty.
i. Check whether the optical received/launched power of optical interfaces is within the allowed range. If the optical launched power of optical interfaces at both ends is normal, but the receive power is lower than the index requirement or there is no optical input, check the fiber pigtail connection and coupling conditions from the optical receive interface to ODF.
ii. If the optical received power on ODFs at the transmitting/receiving sides is too low or no light is received, it indicates that the optical line is faulty. Contact the optical line maintenance personnel to solve the problem in time.
Warning: When a line maintenance person uses OTDR to test the optical cable, remove the fiber pigtail connected to corresponding optical interface so that the strong light from OTDR will not damage the optical interface.
Causes
Fault Location
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 163
iii. Then loop the optical transmitting port and optical receiving port with a fiber pigtail for the optical interface of the local NE and that of the opposite NE to find which optical interface fails.
Note: For the self-loop, ensure the optical received power is in the allowed range, that is, the optical power should be more than sensitivity but less than overload power. Add an optical attenuator when necessary.
2. If no B1/B2 performance is reported any longer after performing self-loop for local optical interface, it indicates that the local optical interface is normal. If no B1/B2 performance is reported any longer after performing self-loop for the opposite optical interface, it indicates the opposite optical interface is normal.
3. Check the performance of the faulty NE. If the EMS does not have B1/B2 but only have B3 performance, it indicates that the higher-order path is faulty. It may be caused by the fault of cross-connect unit in the equipment.
4. Check the performance of the faulty NE. If EMS only has V5 performance, it indicates the lower order path is faulty. It may be caused by the fault of tributary unit or tributary board in the equipment. Reconfigure the timeslots and make them to be dropped at an adjacent NE, or perform AU loopback to judge whether the fault is from the local equipment or the opposite equipment.
END OF STEPS.
To troubleshoot a bit error fault, perform the following steps:
1. Use the test method to locate the fault point as introduce above.
2. If the bit error is from the optical channel, analyze the bit error performance event of the optical interface.
i. Check external causes, for example, improper grounding, too high working temperature, too low/high optical received power of the optical interface.
ii. Observe the bit errors of the optical interface. If all optical interfaces at a site have bit errors, it can be concluded that the fault is caused by clock synchronization problem of the site. If only an optical interface reports the bit error, it may be caused by equipment fault or optical fiber fault.
3. If the bit errors derive from a tributary, analyze the bit error performance event of the tributary. If there are only tributary bit errors, the problem may be caused by the tributary unit fault. Replace the main board of the equipment.
Troubleshooting
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
164 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Warning: Maintenance personnel must analyze the performance carefully, and locate the faulty board by analyzing the meanings and generation mechanism of the basic SDH overheads such as B1/B2/B3/V5. Do not restart or replace the faulty NE without analyzing.
END OF STEPS.
The EMS reports sporadic B1 error bits regularly, several times every 24 hours or once every several days or continuously. There is a BBE (background block error) every one error second without B2, B3 or V5 bit error (a B2 BBE might show up once after B1 BBE occurs 3-5 times; a B3 BBE might show up once after B2 BBE occurs 3-5 times). An accidental V5 bit error makes an affected 2 M signal generate a V5 BBE, imposing very little impact on traffic.
Analyze and handle the fault as follows:
1. Firstly, check whether the optical received power is normal, and whether the optical power is too low (which may cause consecutive big B1 BBE, without a large bit error).
2. If the optical received power is normal, it can be judged that the opposite optical interface is faulty.
END OF STEPS.
The EMS reports continuous B2 BBE and reports multiplex section signal deterioration alarms occasionally.
Analyze and handle the fault as follows:
1. Check the temperature in the equipment room. The severity of bit errors is closely related to the temperature.
2. If the temperature is high or the equipment room is not installed with an air condition, bit errors may occur frequently. Improve the equipment room environment.
3. If the environment temperature is normal, but bit errors still occurs, it can be judged that the equipment may be faulty.
4. Replace the equipment at the receiving end.
END OF STEPS.
One or two 2 M channels have bit errors.
Analyze and handle the fault as follows:
1. First make sure the EMS is available and valid without misreported error bits.
2. Clear the performance count in two sites, and query the performance value of the local site.
Typical Fault 1
Typical Fault 2
Typical Fault 3
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 165
3. If the error bit performance of the tributary is always zero, check the 2 M interfaces and 2 M cables of the two sites or conduct the soft loopback test.
4. If only the local site has bit errors without indicating remote bit error, it can be judged that bit errors are generated from the local site. Query the tributary performance of the opposite site and remote bit error should be indicated. In this case, check the contact of each interface, replace the configured timeslot, and replace the tributary interface.
5. If there are error bits and remote bit error indication on the local site, but there are only local site error bits on the opposite site, the faulty point is on the opposite end. The handling method is the same as that of local site as described in Step 4.
6. If both the local site and the opposite site have bit errors and remote bit error indication, they shall be handled separately. Pay attention to the performance of services passing through the sites.
END OF STEPS.
Almost all 2 M tributaries have error bits.
Analyze and handle the fault as follows:
1. Make sure the EMS is available and valid without misreported error bits.
2. Collect current alarms to find whether there are alarms with higher severity.
3. Compare configured timeslots to tributaries and timeslots with error bits to locate the faulty site.
4. Check whether there are error bits in the optical interface and whether they are near-end error bits or far-end error bits, so as to locate the faulty point.
5. The reasons for a large amount of error bits on the 2 M tributary are, first of all, the clock; secondly, the optical interface unit; and finally the cross-connect unit and 2 M interface.
The handling sequence should be:
i. First switch the clock;
ii. If there are still error bits, check the optical received/launched power of the optical interface.
iii. If the optical power is normal, check other boards or sites by which the tributary passes.
END OF STEPS.
Typical Fault 4
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
166 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Clock Synchronization Fault
The cause of a clock synchronization fault may be:
External cause: optical fiber is reversely connected
Improper operation: wrong clock source configuration, such as, two clock sources co-exist in the network; wrong setting of the clock source class; or mutual extraction of clock
Equipment fault: board failure or deteriorated performance
To troubleshoot a clock synchronization fault, perform the following steps:
1. Check the clock configuration of the EMS, avoiding mutual extraction of clock caused by improper operation. Deliver the correct clock configuration to keep the EMS data consistent with the NE data.
2. Through the EMS, check whether the optical path and tributaries have AU PJC/TU PJC (pointer justification count) performance values. If some pointer has been adjusted, it indicates the board is faulty. Replace the board.
END OF STEPS.
Pointer justification event out of limit alarm is reported on the EMS.
Analyze and handle the fault as follows:
1. The pointer justification alarm may occur at either unlocked or locked clock status.
2. In case of pointer justification alarm, check whether the clock locking status is normal, and handle the loss of lock problem first.
3. For unlocked clock
i. Check for any external factors, such as fiber cut-off.
ii. Check if the clock becomes unlocked due to clock switching failure upon fiber disconnection or forced clock switching on the EMS.
iii. Check the network data configurations and grade settings of clock source. Check whether both sides are wrongly configured with a line clock extracted from the peer and whether the clock switching rules are not configured.
If data configuration is correct, the fault usually lies in the clock source being in use after switchover or board hardware fault. In case of fault, replace the faulty board.
iv. If no clock switchover occurs but the clock is unlocked, the fault is possibly caused by hardware faults. Replace corresponding board of the local/opposite site.
Causes
Troubleshooting
Typical Fault 1
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 167
4. For unlocked clock of the site configured with external clock
i. If unlocked clock occurs at site configured with external clock, check the data configuration according to the operations described in the preceding paragraph to see whether multiple external clock sources are configured mistakenly.
ii. If no data error is found, check the main board, external clock line, and external clock source, and consider replacing the faulty board or cables.
iii. If no external clock switchover occurs but the clock is unlocked, a typical cause is that the board or line is damaged in the process of operation. In this case, consider replacing the main board, external clock cable, or external clock source at the local site.
5. For inferior locking of clock
If pointer justification occurs in case of normal clock locking, it indicates inferior locking of the clock.
When the network is not synchronous, the system compensates for it in a self-healing approach of pointer justification. Network out-of-sync is usually caused by equipment fault. Adjust or replace the main board to fix the problem.
END OF STEPS.
The “Loss of Timing Input” alarm is reported on the EMS.
Analyze and handle the fault as follows:
The EMS can detect the fault of timing input loss, indicating that the local clock unit is normal. The fault causes may be:
Fault of external equipment: the clock source of the opposite equipment connecting to this site is faulty.
Optical interface fault: check the clock source configuration first, and then download the clock configuration and reset the equipment.
Loss of the clock source at the local site: check the clock source.
END OF STEPS.
Typical Fault 2
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
168 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
EMS Connection Fault
The cause of an EMS connection fault may be:
External cause: power supply problem, such as power failure or abnormal power supply voltage; fiber faults, such as fiber performance deterioration or high loss
Improper operation: wrong ECC/DCC configuration
Equipment fault: EMS host fault, equipment fault, lots of performance data of the NEs are reported to the EMS which results in blocked ECC
To troubleshoot an EMS connection fault, perform the following steps:
1. Check external cause, such as power failure and fiber performance deterioration.
2. Check whether the ECC/DCC configuration of the EMS is correct.
3. Use test method to locate the faulty site through self-loop segment by segment.
4. Use observation method to check the main board and other boards.
END OF STEPS.
The EMS cannot be connected to NE through Qx interface. On the EMS host, the NCP unit of the NE can not be pinged successfully, but itself can be pinged successfully.
Analyze and handle the fault as follows:
1. Check whether correct type of network cable is used and whether the network cable is normal.
2. Check whether the computer network configuration is correct. The EMS can ping through itself, it indicates that the network adaptor is correctly installed and the network configuration takes effect. The EMS cannot ping the NCP unit successfully; it indicates that the EMS computer, the NE IP address and the subnet mask may be in different network section.
3. Set the all the pins of the DIP switch (S3) on the main board to “ON”, setting the NCP unit to Download status. Execute the telnet 192.192.192.11 command and other commands to check whether the NE IP and host IP comply with the EMS database configurations.
END OF STEPS.
Causes
Troubleshooting
Typical Fault 1
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 169
Insufficient sub-manager management networks
Analyze and handle the fault as follows:
1. Check whether all the sub-managers have been started.
If the ZXONM E300 EMS runs on a Unix operating system platform, execute the command ps - ef |grep smgr to check whether they have been started.
If the EMS runs on a Windows 2000 operating system platform, use the task manager to check it.
2. Check whether the NE quantity is beyond the management capability of sub-managers. It is recommended that the maximum number under the management of each sub-manager should not exceed 100. If the number exceeds this value, start another sub-manager.
END OF STEPS.
The EMS is unable to manage the access NE, or other NEs except the access NE.
The possible causes are as follows:
The current EMS and NEs do not belong to the same network section.
For an NE with the IP protocol stack version, the EMS and the NE belong to the same network segment. But the user does not set IP address of the access NE as default gateway or do not set a route.
There are redundant IP routes on the EMS.
END OF STEPS.
The EMS can only normally manage some NEs in the network.
Analyze and handle the fault as follows:
1. Check whether the unmanageable NEs are offline. If Yes, set the offline NEs to online NEs.
2. Check whether the optical connections between NEs are correct.
3. Check whether NCP versions of the unmanageable NEs are correct. If they are incorrect, re-download the NCP application program which supports this EMS.
4. When the EMS runs on a Unix operating system platform, check whether the system parameters of maxfiles and nfiles are correct.
END OF STEPS.
Typical Fault 2
Typical Fault 3
Typical Fault 4
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
170 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Confusion in IP area division leads to abnormal NE management.
Analyze and handle the fault as follows:
In actual networking, avoid dividing any area or use the backbone area under any circumstances. Generally, when there are too many NEs on a network (e.g., over 64), the NEs should be divided into different areas. When the number of NEs exceeds 128, they must be divided into different areas. In this case, if the network section division is wrong, it becomes difficult for the EMS to monitor all the NEs.
1. Check whether all the NEs distributed in different areas are directly connected with the border NEs in backbone area.
2. Check whether the total number of NEs in the backbone area and non-backbone area directly connected with border NEs exceeds 128. If Yes, the normal management becomes impossible.
It is recommended that each border NE is directly connected with only one non-backbone area.
3. Check whether the NEs in backbone area are connected properly.
4. Since the ECCs cannot directly work with each other among non-backbone areas, and can only work via the backbone area, so please check whether the ECC path between the backbone area and the border NE fails.
5. Try to reduce the border NEs. Sometimes, dividing NEs into many areas may complicate inter-area relationship.
END OF STEPS.
Refer to Appendix C for the definitions of NE IP address and the principles of routing.
Typical Fault 5
Related Information
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 171
Fan Fault
The cause of a fan fault may be:
External cause: loose contact between the fan module and the backplane
Equipment cause: backplane fault
To troubleshoot a fan fault, perform the following steps:
1. Observe the running status of the fan, and check whether the fan is damaged.
2. Check if there is any fault caused by external factors.
3. Use the unplugging/plugging method and replacement method to check if there is any fault in the backplane.
END OF STEPS.
Equipment Interconnection Fault
The cause of an equipment interconnection fault may be:
Optical fibers or cables are wrongly connected.
The equipment is interconnected with other manufacturers’ equipment, and the equipment of one side is improperly grounded, or the equipment of both sides do not share common ground.
The internal clocks of transmission network are synchronized and so are the internal clocks of switching network, but the two networks are not synchronized with each other
Inconsistent definition of overhead bytes in the SDH frame structures of different manufacturers
To troubleshoot an equipment interconnection fault, perform the following steps:
1. Check whether the physical connections between the equipment are correct. Avoid open solder point/cold joint of cable and ill cable contact.
2. Check the alarms and performance at both sides of interconnected equipment, which help locate the fault.
3. Check grounding and the ground-sharing status of the equipment at both sides.
Grounding problem is usually caused by two interconnected equipment not sharing the ground properly. The grounding
Causes
Troubleshooting
Causes
Troubleshooting
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
172 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
resistance fails to reach the required index. The DDF is not grounded properly.
The equipment room usually adopts joint grounding. For the sites that do not adopt joint grounding, conduct the test carefully during hardware installation to ensure that the equipment at both sides share common ground. Check the grounding status of shielding layer of the coaxial port.
4. Check clock synchronization of whole network.
The switches and GSM equipment of some manufacturers impose high requirements for clock synchronization throughout the network. Through the SDH transmission network, if the clock of module office is not synchronized with the clock of mother office, it may result in trunk slip, dial-up access service interruption or even frequent call interruption. Firstly, check if the clock of transmission equipment is faulty. If it is normal, check whether the clock planning throughout the network is rational. If not rational, adjust the clock synchronization scheme, to synchronize clocks in the whole network.
5. Check for the consistency of overhead bytes definition in SDH frame structure of interconnected equipment.
END OF STEPS.
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 173
Typical Performance Event and Handling Physical Interface Performance Event
Performance of 2 M, 34 M and 45 M physical interfaces is embodied via CV (Code Violation), which is the detection result of telecom number encoding. The HDB3 code pattern is adopted for the encoding of 2 M, 34 M and 45 M signals. Once the equipment detects any signal encoding error, it will report CV performance event.
The causes of CV performance event for different electrical signals are similar. Take the common 2 M signal for example. Its CV performance event may be caused by:
Part performance of 2 M interface is not good.
At the moment of plugging/unplugging a 2 M cable, the tributary port counts slight CV.
The 2 M cable is welded or crimped improperly.
If almost all tributaries report CV performance event, the probable cause may be that the switching equipment and transmission equipment do not share the common ground.
The quality of 2 M cable is poor.
The impact of CV performance event on traffic is analyzed as follows:
If the CV count is small, such as there is a few or none CV in 15 minutes or sporadic CV reported in 24 hours, the services will not be influenced.
If the CV count is big in 15 minutes and keeps increasing, the services may be affected. Noises or illegible data codes may be generated or even services may be interrupted.
When the CV count bursts to a great value, the services will be interrupted instantaneously.
To process CV performance event, perform the following steps:
1. Isolate the switching equipment from the ZTE transmission equipment, test corresponding transmission channels of them with a BER tester. Determine which equipment is the source of CV performance event.
Overview
Causes
Impact on Traffic
Processing
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
174 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
2. If the CV performance event comes from the transmission equipment, disconnect the service on the channel first. Find the NE which reports the CV performance on the EMS and locate the fault point. Then process the CV performance according to possible causes as follows:
If the CV performance event is caused by the interface performance of the 2 M interface, which can be judged through hardware loopback, replace the board to resolve the problem.
If the CV performance is caused by poor connection quality of 2 M cable, weld or crimp the cable again to avoid loose contact due to dry joint or improper crimping.
If the CV performance is caused by poor quality of 2 M cable itself, replace the cable.
If the CV performance is caused by improper grounding due to different interface grounding wires of equipment designed by different manufacturers. Make new grounding wires to solve the problem or connect a capacitance (0.1 μF-1 μF tantalum capacitance) serially to the cable core at the transmitting end.
Note: In the equipment room where the ZXMP S200 is installed, the shell of the distribution frame should be connected to the protection ground in the equipment room. Both the grounding resistance of the protection ground and the grounding resistance of the DC working ground should be less than 4 Ω.
3. If the CV performance event comes from the switching equipment, process it according to related manual of the switching equipment. You can also refer to the processing method for the transmission equipment.
Tip: While the equipment running normally, users can connect BER testers to idle transmission channels to perform 24-hour test so as to select several standby transmission channels with good performance. Then when large number of CV performance events burst, services can be switched to these standby transmission channels to avoid service interruption.
END OF STEPS.
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 175
RS Performance Event
Regenerator section (RS) performance event is embodied by the RS overhead byte B1, which uses 8 bits for parity check. The B1 byte is detected and terminated at the receiving end NE. It will not be forwarded to the next NE.
The cause of an RS performance event may be:
External cause: dirty fiber connector, wrong connection of fiber pigtail, deteriorated fiber performance or high loss
Equipment cause: performance of optical modules and clock deteriorates
Personal cause: bit error inserted into the regenerator section is not cleared on the EMS
The impact of RS performance events on traffic is analyzed as follows:
Sporadic bit errors occur regularly, that is, bit errors occur several times in every 24 hours or once in several days, and there is one BBE per errored second averagely. Such bit errors generally do not generate lower-level bit errors and therefore has just a little impact on traffic.
Serious bit errors occur regularly, that is, bit errors occur several times in every 24 hours or once in several days, and there are at least five BBEs per errored second averagely. They are accompanied by transient Out Of Frame (OOF) alarm which lasts 5 to 6 seconds and Out-of-Frame Second (OFS) count now and then.
Such bit errors generate lower-level bit errors of B2 and B3. Therefore they have impact on all services. Transient mosaic or frame stop symptom will occur especially for video services, although it is imperceptible to telephone or data service subscribers.
In cases of continuous serious bit error burst, performance out of limit alarms and OOF alarms are reported, unavailable time starts, and transient interruption of services occurs frequently.
To process RS performance event, perform the following steps:
1. Loop the optical line interface of local equipment.
2. Adjust the insertion depth of the fiber pigtail properly.
3. If the alarm disappears, it can be judged that the alarm is caused by too high or too low optical power.
4. If the optical power is too high, add an optical attenuator in the line.
Overview
Causes
Impact on Traffic
Processing
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
176 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
5. If the optical power is too low, clean the optic fiber connectors and reconnect the fiber pigtail, or replace the optical module with an optical module that launches high optical power.
6. If the performance of optical modules and clock unit deteriorates, replace the board.
7. If it is caused by bit errors inserted on the EMS,
i. Select the NE on the EMS;
ii. Select Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Insert Error Code;
iii. Remove the inserted error bits in the pop-up dialog box;
iv. Click Apply button to issue the command.
END OF STEPS.
MS Performance Event
Multiplex Section (RS) performance event is embodied by the MS overhead bytes B2, K1 and K2. Among them, the bytes K1 and K2 are used for MS-PSD (protection switching duration) and MS-PSC (protection switching count) performance, while B2 is used for monitoring MS error bits.
Three B2 bytes (altogether 24 bits) are used for parity check. Bit errors are not forwarded. They terminate at the receiving terminal NE which processes MS overheads and return an indication to the opposite terminal. Therefore, an REG NE will forward B2 bytes to the next NE without any change. Both an ADM NE and a TM NE will terminate B2 bytes, originate the check count again, and return the remote indication to the transmitting NE.
Note: Remote indication is a message returned from the receiving end to the transmitting end, which indicates the receiving of errored bits at the receiving end.
As the MS remote errored block indication byte, the byte M1 in the MS overheads is used for remote error indication. After the receiving NE detects B2 error, it will store the error count in the M1 byte, and send it back to the transmitting NE. After the transmitting NE detects the M1 byte, it will report B2 error count, that is, the performance FEES/FEBBE/FESES/FEUAS. Therefore, B2 BBE/ES/SES/UAS of an NE goes along with B2 FEBBE/FEES/FESES/FEUAS of its opposite NE.
Overview
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 177
The cause of an MS performance event may be:
B1 bit error; the causes of B1 bit error are introduced in RS performance event
The performance of optical interface is deteriorated
On the EMS, errored bit inserted into the multiplex section is not cleared
MS protection switching occurs in the network
The impact of MS performance events on traffic is analyzed as follows:
If there are only a few B2 errored bits, the impact on the system is small. When the performance deteriorates continuously and the error count exceeds the performance threshold, a performance over-threshold alarm will be reported.
If the EMS reports the OOF alarm and B2 performance over-threshold alarm at the same time, the MS protection switching will occur in the network configured with the MS protection switching function. Upon the protection switching, MS-PSD and MS-PSC count begins. In case of normal switching, MS-PSC count is an even number; in case of switching recovery, MS-PSD time is cleared to zero, waiting for recounting at the next switching.
To process MS performance event, perform the following steps according to the causes:
1. If B2 bit errors are caused by B1 bit errors, deal with B1 bit errors first.
2. If it is caused by bit errors inserted on the EMS,
i. Select the NE on the EMS;
ii. Select Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Insert Error Code;
iii. Remove the inserted error bits in the pop-up dialog box;
iv. Click Apply button to issue the command.
3. If MS protection switching occurs in the network and the MS-PSC count is an odd number, process the performance as follows:
i. Check whether the NCP unit of the main board is faulty, the optical interface is looped, the protection relationship is wrongly configured, the APS is stoped, the APS-ID is not conisistent, or the protection switching command is not consistent etc.
ii. If any fault or wrong operation is found, solve it first. If not, issue the APS reset command to each node in the multiplex section ring.
END OF STEPS.
Causes
Impact on Traffic
Processing
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
178 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Higher-Order Path Performance Event
Higher-order path performance event is embodied by the higher-order path overhead B3 byte, which monitors the bit error performance of VC4 transmitted in STM-N frames. 8 bits are used for parity check on the higher-order path. The byte B3 is generated by the beginning terminal in the transmission channel. It is forwarded transparently through the ZXMP S200 without any processing, and finally terminated at the end of the channel.
The remote error indication byte for B3 bit error is the higher-order path overhead G1. The byte G1 sends the status and performance information of the terminal back to the souce terminal of VC4 path, so as to enable monitoring on the status and performance of the whole bidirectional channel at any end or any point of the channel. B3 BBE/ES/SES/UAS of an NE goes along with B3 FEBBE/FEES/FESES/FEUAS of the opposite NE.
B3 bit error is usually generated together with B1 and B2 bit errors. It may be caused by:
External cause: too high or low optical power
Equipment cause: deteriorated optical interface and clock performance
Personal cause: errored bit inserted into the higher-order path is not deleted on the EMS
The impact of higher-order path performance events on traffic is analyzed as follows:
Few B3 errored bits have small impact on equipment.
When performance continues deteriorating and B3 error count exceeds the performance threshold, B3 error performance over-threshold alarm will be reported. As a result, the transmission quality of the channel declines.
To process higher-order path performance event, perform the following steps:
1. Check whether there are B1 and B2 error. If Yes, process B1 error and B2 error first.
2. If no B1 or B2 error exists, locate the starting point of the B3 error in the channel where the B3 error is reported. Resolve the B3 error problem at the starting point. Then find the next starting point of B3 error along the channel. Carry on until all the errors are resolved.
3. If the performance event is caused by bit errors inserted on the EMS,
i. Select the NE on the EMS;
Overview
Causes
Impact on Traffic
Processing
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 179
ii. Select Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Insert Error Code;
iii. Remove the inserted error bits in the pop-up dialog box;
iv. Click Apply button to issue the command.
END OF STEPS.
Lower-Order Path Performance Event
Lower-order path performance event is embodied via the lower-order path overhead V5 byte.
The first and second bits of V5 are used to monitor the bit error in the lower-order path through 2-bit parity check. As the remote error indication bit, the third bit of V5 is used to return the errored block count detected in the lower-order path to the transmitting end. The V5 BBE/ES/SES/UAS of an NE goes along V5 FEBBE/FEES/FESES/FEUAS of the opposite NE.
V5 error may be caused by:
Multiplex section bit error or regenerator section bit error
Faulty tributary unit
Asynchronous clock
Errored bit inserted into the lower-order path is not deleted on the EMS
The impact of lower-order path performance events on traffic is analyzed as follows:
Few V5 errored bits have small impact on equipment.
When performance continues deteriorating and V5 error count exceeds the performance threshold, V5 error performance over-threshold alarm will be reported. As a result, the transmission quality of the channel declines.
To process lower-order path performance event, perform the following steps according to different causes:
1. If V5 error bits are caused by MS bit error or RS bit error, and there are B1, B2 or B3 error bits in the system at the same time, process B1, B2, B3, MS and RS bit error first.
2. If it is caused by tributary unit performance deterioration, replace the board.
3. If it is caused by asynchronous clock, handle the clock fault first according to the method introduced in the section “Clock Synchronization Fault”.
Overview
Causes
Impact on Traffic
Processing
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
180 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
4. If it is caused by bit errors inserted on the EMS, delete the error bits on the EMS, and issue the command.
END OF STEPS.
Pointer Justification Performance Event
In SDH frames, some bytes at specific positions are used to indicate where data information in the frames starts, that is, to indicate the phase of data information. These bytes are called pointers.
When the network is in synchronous working status, the pointer is used for phase alignment between synchronous signals. When the network is out of synchronization, the frequency and phase can be justified. Depending on the speed of clocks carried by various signals, pointer justification is classified into positive pointer justification and negative pointer justification. Pointer justification bytes are detected and terminated at the receiving end NE and will not be forwarded to the next NE.
During the multiplexing and mapping of SDH, three types of pointers are involved: AU-4, TU-3 and TU-12, as introduced below:
AU-4 pointer is located at the first nine bytes of the fourth row in an SDH frame, used for determining the starting position of VC-4 in AU.
TU-3 pointer is located in TUG-3. It has nine bytes used to determine the starting position of VC-3 in TU-3.
TU-12 pointer has three bytes used to determine the starting position of VC-12 in TU-12.
AU4 pointer justification may give rise to TU3 or TU12 pointer justification event. A pointer justification performance event may be caused by:
External cause: the clock is out of lock or the locking quality of the clock is poor
Equipment cause: board fault
EMS cause: the manually forced switching command is not cancelled; or the configuration of clock source is wrong
The impact of pointer justification performance events on traffic is analyzed as follows:
A pointer justification event indicates a problem of network synchronization. Slight point justification has little impact on the equipment, while major pointer justification indicates
Overview
Causes
Impact on Traffic
Chapter 2 Equipment Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 181
unlocked clock. In this case, the service quality is at risk and call for immediate handling.
If the network is out of synchronization and goes on deteriorating, when the pointer justification event count exceeds the threshold, the corresponding performance over-threshold alarm will be reported on the EMS.
To process pointer justification performance event, perform the following steps according to different causes:
1. Handle AU4 pointer justification event
i. If the clock is unlocked, check whether the clock switching occurs. If not, the equipment may be faulty.
ii. If the clock is switched over, check the configuration of the clock source, especially the data configuration, clock source grade configuration, extracted clock source configuration and the setting of clock switching rules for any error.
iii. If there is no configuration error, check whether there is a hardware fault in the clock source after switchover. If so, simply replace the board.
2. Handle TU3 pointer justification event
i. If a TU3 pointer justification event concurs with an AU4 pointer justification event, the AU4 pointer justification problem should be resolved first.
ii. If the equipment is faulty, replace the board.
3. Handle TU12 pointer justification event
i. If a TU12 pointer justification event concurs with an AU4 pointer justification event, the AU4 pointer justification problem should be resolved first.
ii. If the equipment is faulty, replace the board.
END OF STEPS.
Processing
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
182 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
This page is intentionally blank.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 183
A p p e n d i x A
Packing, Transportation & Storage
This appendix introduces the packing, transportation and storage requirements of the ZXMP S200.
Packing Generally, the ZXMP S200 chassis has been equipped with the power module, fan module, main board and dustproof module before being packed.
The packing procedures of the ZXMP S200 chassis are as follows:
1. Cover the chassis with an aluminum-foil composite-film bag; vacuumize the bag and hot melt it for sealing.
2. Protect the chassis covered with the bag with front and back cushions, and then place it in a carton.
3. Seal the carton with adhesive tapes.
Cables and other accessories are sealed in plastic bags with desiccant and then packed in corrugated cases. Foam boards are used to absorb shock on the products inside.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
184 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Transportation Pack the products properly before transportation. Cover
them with canvas to guard against dampness and rain during transportation.
Pile the products in good order. Stockpiles should be compact and safe so that they will not sway or slide in transportation, which may result in damage to the products. Do not place the products upside down.
In long distance transportation, do not load the products in open vessels or vehicles and not put them in open storage during transhipment. Do not transport the products together with flammable, explosive articles and those susceptible to corrosion. Besides, product parts should be free from rain, snow, liquid or any mechanical damage.
Handle the cargo with care. Never topple the cargo or place it upside down.
Avoid transhipment of products. Products should be transported and handled with machines carefully.
Storage For storage, the components should be kept in the original
packages which are protective. Make sure that no component is lost.
The valid storage period is six months since the packing time. In storage, the warehouse should be properly ventilated, the storage temperature should be within the range from –10°C to +40°C and the relative humidity should not be more than 75%. In addition, the acid gas, alkaline gas and other toxic gases in the air should be compliance with the relevant regulations on environmental protection.
All packages should meet damp-proof requirements, that is, packages should be placed on racks that are at least 30 cm from the ground and 40 cm from any wall.
Packages should be stacked according to the instructions on the package. Stack layers should not exceed the specified limit.
The products in package should be used as soon as possible after acceptance, preferably within six month. Any product packages should be unpacked within 3 months after delivery.
In some special cases, two parties, provider and customer, can negotiate specific requirements for transportation and storage.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 185
A p p e n d i x B
Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
This appendix introduces the dimension and structure of 19-inch ZTE transmission equipment cabinet (ZTE cabinet for short). It also describes the procedures, operations and requirements for installing the ZTE cabinet.
Dimension and Structure The ZTE cabinet is a standard 19-inch cabinet in compliant with the IEC standard. The cabinet is manufactured with a unified structure design, which features excellent electromagnetic shielding and heat dissipation performance.
Its structural parameters are shown in Table 52.
T AB L E 52 D I M E N S I O N S AN D W E I G H T S O F T H E ZTE TR AN S M I S S I O N E Q U I P M E N T CAB I N E T S
Dimensions (H × W × D, mm) Weight (kg)
2 000 × 600 × 300 70
2 200 × 600 × 300 80
2 600 × 600 × 300 90
2 000 × 600 × 600 80
2 200 × 600 × 600 90
2 600 × 600 × 600 100
Note: The weights provided in the above table are those when the cabinets are empty.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
186 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
For example, the outline and dimensions of the ZTE cabinet with the depth of 300 mm are illustrated in Figure 80, and a cabinet with the depth of 600 mm is illustrated in Figure 81.
F I G U R E 80 D I M E N S I O N S O F T H E ZTE TR AN S M I S S I O N E Q U I P M E N T C AB I N E T (300 M M D E E P)
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 187
F I G U R E 81 D I M E N S I O N S O F T H E ZTE TR AN S M I S S I O N E Q U I P M E N T C AB I N E T (600 M M D E E P)
Cabinet Components Figure 82 shows the components in a 2,200 mm (H) × 600 mm (W) × 300 mm (D) cabinet.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
188 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 82 CAB I N E T C O M P O N E N T S
1. Cable fixing plate 2. Cable arranging clip
3. Cabinet wiring area 4. Ring trip switch
5. Ring trip reset button 6. Grounding busbar
7. Mounting bracket 8. Small wiring door
9. Power cable outlet 10. Top wiring inlet
11. Alarm board 12. Antistatic wrist strap hook
13. Antistatic wrist strap socket 14. Door lock
15. Front door 16. Bottom wiring outlet
Cabinet Installation Flow The cabinet installation flow is shown in Figure 83. Flowchart
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 189
F I G U R E 83 CAB I N E T I N S T AL L AT I O N FL O W
The following briefly introduces the process involved in cabinet installation:
Determine the installation mode: Describes the installation modes which can be used for cabinet installation and how to determine the installation mode.
Prepare installation accessories: Introduces necessary installation accessories needed in cabinet installation.
Determine installation position: Describes the requirements to be met while determine the installation position of cabinet.
Remove cabinet doors: Describes how to remove the front door and back door of the cabinet.
Install/Fix cabinet: Describes how to install and fix the cabinet in different installation modes.
Installation Process
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
190 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Install cabinet doors: Describes how to install the front door and back door of the cabinet.
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 191
Determining Installation Mode Determine the installation mode of the cabinet according to the ground condition and user’s requirements. The cabinet can be installed on concrete ground, wooden floor or raised floor, depending on different ground conditions.
There are two installation modes for 19-inch ZTE transmission cabinets: direct installation and base installation.
If the cabinet is to be installed on concrete ground or wooden floor, select the direct installation mode.
If the cabinet is to be installed on raised floor, select the base installation mode.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
192 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Preparing Installation Accessories To prepare accessories needed in the cabinet installation
Check the installation accessories according to the installation mode and corresponding accessories listed in Table 53 and make sure all necessary accessories are available.
T AB L E 53 I N S T AL L AT I O N AC C E S S O R I E S F O R ZTE C AB I N E T
Installation Mode
Accessory Model Unit Qty Remark
Spring washer
- Piece 4 Match with the bolt [Note]
Plat washer - Piece 4 Match with the bolt [Note]
Concrete ground
(installation without feet)
Expansion bolt
M12 × 100 Set 4 With nut [Note]
Concrete ground
(installation with feet)
Pressure plate
624485000101
Set 4
With expansion bolt, nut and washer
Wooden hex screw
M12 × 65 Piece 4 -
Wooden floor
Flat washer - Piece 4 Match with the wooden screw
Hex bolt M12 × 40 Piece 4 Accessory of the base
Spring washer
- Piece 4
Accessory of the base, match with the bolt
Flat washer - Piece 8
Accessory of the base, match with the bolt
Nut M12 Piece 4 Accessory of the base
Raised floor (with fixed base)
Expansion bolt
M12 × 100 Set 4 With washer, nut and base accessories
Purpose
Steps
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 193
Installation Mode
Accessory Model Unit Qty Remark
Base
H
W: 300 mm
D: 600 mm/ 300 mm
Set 1
Determine the height “H” according to the project survey. The depth is consistent with that of the cabinet.
Hex bolt M12 × 40 Piece 4 Accessory of the base
Spring washer
- Piece 4
Accessory of the base, match with the bolt
Flat washer - Piece 8
Accessory of the base, match with the bolt
Nut M12 Piece 4 Accessory of the base
Expansion bolt
M12 × 100 Set 4
Accessory of the base, with washer and nut
Raised floor (with adjustable base)
Adjustable base
W: 600 mm
D: 300mm/ 600 mm
H: 160 mm-260 mm
260 mm-460 mm
Set 1
The depth is consistent with that of the cabinet.
Upper fixing board
- Piece 4
Connect and fix the ceiling and the cabling rack
Hex bolt M8 × 25 Piece 8 -
Spring washer
- Piece 8 Match with the bolt
Flat washer - Piece 8 Match with the bolt
Top fixing
Nut M8 Piece 4 -
Connecting board
Piece 2 Fix parallel cabinets
Hex bolt M8 × 25 Piece 4 -
Spring washer
- Piece 4 Match with the bolt
Side-by-side fixing
Flat washer - Piece 4 Match with the bolt
Note: All accessories are delivered with the pressure plate.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
194 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Determining Installation Position To determine the installation position of cabinet in the equipment room
1. Locate cabinet installation position in such a way to facilitate easy maintenance, achieve even load bearing of the ground, and facilitate installation and system capacity expansion.
Note: When the equipment is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, it is necessary to consider the maintenance and cable leading-out requirements.
2. Consider the arrangement, installation positions and the directions of the cabinets according to the requirements mentioned in the engineering design.
3. Make sure that no trough or support rack blocks the cable lead-in/out hole of the cabinet. If there is any, discuss with the customer to change the installation position of the trough or support rack.
4. Check the fixing methods of all subracks of the cabinet, contact reliability of accessories and plug-in components. Fasten screws and plug-in components if they are loose.
5. Place the outlining template at the place where the cabinet is to be installed and mark the positions of the mounting holes.
Note: “Template” is a paper board delivered with the equipment for marking the installation position. It is of the same size as the base of the equipment. Figure 84 shows the template.
F I G U R E 84 MAR K I N G TE M P L AT E O F C AB I N E T (U N I T : M M )
420
600
230/530
300/600
4-φ16
Edge
Purpose
Steps
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 195
6. Re-measure the holes location and ensure all the sizes are correct.
Warning: To avoid any error, check and confirm holes positions after the holes position lines are drawn with the template. Ensure all the sizes are correct.
END OF STEPS.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
196 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Removing Cabinet Doors Overview
For the convenience of the cabinet installation, it is recommended to disassemble the front and back doors of the cabinet before the installation and reinstall them after the construction.
Removing cabinet doors includes:
Removing front door
Removing back door
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 197
Detaching Front Door
To remove the front door of the cabinet
1. Open the front door about a 90° angle. Remove the grounding cable from the grounding terminal on the bottom of the front door, as shown in Figure 85.
F I G U R E 85 DE T AC H I N G T H E FR O N T D O O R (1 )
1. Pivot sleeve
2. Door pivot
3. Door baffle
4. Grounding terminal on cabinet door
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
198 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
2. Hold the front door, and pull the upper and lower door pivots off the pivot sleeve on the cabinet. Turn the door pivots till they are locked to the pivot baffle.
3. Hold the front door, and slant it outward slowly. Hold it from both sides and lift it to remove the alignment hole at the bottom of the front door from the alignment pin on the bottom of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 86.
F I G U R E 86 DE T AC H I N G T H E FR O N T D O O R (2 )
4. Remove the front door from the cabinet.
END OF STEPS.
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 199
Detaching Back Door
To remove the back door of the cabinet
1. Remove the six screws that fix the back door to the cabinet, as shown in Figure 87.
F I G U R E 87 DE T AC H I N G T H E B AC K D O O R (1 )
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
200 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
2. Hold the back door, and slant it outward slowly. Hold it from both sides and lift it to remove the alignment hole at the bottom of the back door from the alignment pin on the bottom of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 88.
F I G U R E 88 DE T AC H I N G T H E B AC K D O O R (2 )
3. Remove the back door from the cabinet.
END OF STEPS.
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 201
Installing and Fixing Cabinets Overview
There are four fixing modes for the cabinet:
Bottom fixing
Top fixing
Side-by-side fixing
Back-to-back fixing
Generally, four holes at the inner side are used for top fixing and the other four holes on the outer side are used for side-by-side cabinet fixing and back-to-back fixing.
The sizes of installation holes on the cabinet top are shown in Figure 89. There are eight M8 screw holes at the top of the cabinet.
F I G U R E 89 I N S T AL L AT I O N H O L E S I Z E S O N T H E C AB I N E T TO P
Bottom Fixing
The bottom fixing procedures of the cabinet are different depending on the ground condition. The following lists five bottom fixing cases in terms of different ground.
Cabinet installation on concrete ground (without feet)
Cabinet installation on concrete ground (with feet)
Cabinet installation on wooden floor
Cabinet installation on raised floor (with fixed base)
Cabinet installation on raised floor (with adjustable base)
Overview
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
202 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
To install and fix the cabinet on different grounds
The following describes how to install and fix the cabinet on concrete ground without feet:
1. Mark the positions of mounting holes using the marking template as shown in Figure 90 at the location where the cabinet is to be installed.
F I G U R E 90 MAR K I N G TE M P L AT E O F C AB I N E T (U N I T : M M )
420
600
230/530
300/600
4-φ16
Edge
2. Drill four Φ16mm round holes to a depth of about 75mm using a percussive drill at the marked positions.
3. Clean the ground. Insert four expansion bolts (M12 × 100) in the holes and then fix them.
4. Remove the four feet at the bottom of the cabinet.
5. Move the cabinet to the installation position and point the installation holes at the bottom of the cabinet to the expansion bolts.
6. First place flat washer on each expansion bolt and place spring washer and a nut on each expansion bolt.
7. Check and confirm the cabinet is horizontal and on the correct position. Then secure the locking nuts of four feet.
Purpose
Steps of Cabinet
Installation on Concrete
Ground (Without Feet)
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 203
Figure 91 illustrates the installation of a cabinet on the concrete ground without feet.
F I G U R E 91 CAB I N E T I N S T AL L AT I O N O N C O N C R E T E GR O U N D (W I T H O U T FE E T )
1. Nut
2. Spring washer
3. Flat washer
4. Cabinet
5. Concrete ground
6. Expansion bolt
END OF STEPS.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
204 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The following describes how to install and fix the cabinet on concrete ground with feet:
1. Mark the positions of mounting holes of the pressure plates using the marking template as shown in Figure 92.
F I G U R E 92 PO S I T I O N S O F M O U N T I N G H O L E S O F A P R E S S U R E P L AT E
Unit: mm
Note: The positions of mounting holes in the installation mode with feet are different from those without feet.
2. Drill four Φ16mm round holes to a depth of about 75mm using a percussive drill at the marked positions.
3. Clean the ground. Insert four expansion bolts (M12 × 100) in the holes and then fix them.
4. Move the cabinet to the installation and adjust its feet to keep the cabinet horizontal.
5. Place four pressure plates across the expansion bolts and make them press on four feet of the cabinet respectively.
6. Place a flat washer, a spring washer and a nut in turn on each expansion bolt.
7. Check and confirm the cabinet is horizontal and on the correct position. Then secure the locking nuts of four feet.
Note: The cabinet height above the ground level will be higher than the standard height, by 70 mm in case of this installation mode with feet.
Steps of Cabinet
Installation on Concrete
Ground (With Feet)
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 205
Figure 93 illustrates the installation of a cabinet on the concrete ground with feet.
F I G U R E 93 CAB I N E T I N S T AL L AT I O N O N C O N C R E T E GR O U N D W I T H FE E T
1. Cabinet
2. Locking nut
3. Pressure plate
4. Feet
5. Expansion bolt
6. Nut
7. Spring washer
8. Flat washer
9. Concrete ground
END OF STEPS.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
206 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The following describes how to install and fix the cabinet on wooden floor:
1. Dismount the feet before erecting the cabinet.
2. Mark the mounting holes positions using the marking template as shown in Figure 84 on the installation location.
3. Drill four Φ6mm round holes at the marked positions using a hand-held electric drill.
4. Move the cabinet to the location and align the mounting holes at the bottom of the cabinet with the holes on the floor.
5. Insert a wooden hex screw in each mounting hole to fix the cabinet. Figure 94 illustrates the cabinet installation on wooden floor.
F I G U R E 94 CAB I N E T I N S T AL L AT I O N O N W O O D E N FL O O R
1. Wooden hex screw 2. Flat washer
3. Wooden floor 4. Cabinet
END OF STEPS.
Steps of Cabinet
Installation on Wooden Floor
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 207
The following describes how to install and fix the cabinet on raised floor (with fixed base):
Note: The installation base of the ZTE’s 19-inch cabinet is shown in Figure 95. The height of the installation base can be customized as required.
F I G U R E 95 I N S T AL L AT I O N B AS E O F C AB I N E T (U N I T : M M )
1. Dismount its feet before erecting the cabinet.
2. Check whether the height of the base is equal to the distance between the concrete ground and the upper surface of the raised floor. Make sure that the size of the installation base satisfies the installation requirements.
3. Determine the location of the cabinet and mark the positions of the mounting holes. The mounting holes at the installation base are of the same size as required for the cabinet. The marking template shown in Figure 84 can also be used for the marking.
Caution: Keep the installation base away from the floor framework to maintain the integrity of the framework. Remove the floor framework when the difference is unavoidable.
4. Drill four Φ16mm round holes to a depth of about 75 mm using a percussive drill at the marked positions on the concrete ground.
5. Clean the ground. Insert four expansion bolts (M12 × 100) in the holes and then fix them.
Steps of Cabinet
Installation on Raised Floor (with Fixed
Base)
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
208 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
6. Move the installation base to the installation location and align the mounting holes at the bottom of the base with the expansion bolts. Then use flat washers, spring washers and nuts to fix the expansion bolts.
7. Move the cabinet on the installation base and align the mounting holes at the bottom of the cabinet with those at the top of the base. Fix the cabinet on the base using hex bolts (M12 × 40), flat washers, spring washers and nuts.
Figure 96 shows the cabinet installation on the raised floor with a fixed base.
F I G U R E 96 CAB I N E T I N S T AL L AT I O N O N R AI S E D FL O O R W I T H F I X E D BAS E
1. Hex bolt 2. Flat washer 3. Cabinet
4. Spring washer 5. Nut 6. Base
7. Concrete ground 8. Expansion bolt
END OF STEPS.
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 209
The following describes how to install and fix the cabinet on raised floor (with adjustable base):
Note: Table 54 lists the types and specifications of available adjustable bases of ZTE products.
T AB L E 54 AD J U S T AB L E B A S E TY P E S
Adjustable Base Name Remarks
300 depth base 160-260 Applicable to the transmission cabinet of 300 mm deep, the adjustable height range is 160 mm to 260 mm
300 depth base 260-460 Applicable to the transmission cabinet of 300 mm deep, the adjustable height range is 260 mm to 460 mm
600 depth base 160-260 Applicable to the transmission cabinet of 600 mm deep, the adjustable height range is 160 mm to 260 mm
600 depth base 260-460 Applicable to the transmission cabinet of 600 mm deep, the adjustable height range is 260 mm to 460 mm
The adjustable bases of different types have the same structures, only varying in dimensions. Taking the 300 depth base 160-260 as example, its structure is shown in Figure 97.
F I G U R E 97 ST R U C T U R E O F 300 B AS E 160-260
1. Rough-adjustment bolt 2. Lower frame
3. Pressure plate 4. Expansion bolt
5. Locking nut 6. Fine-adjustment holder
7. Mark of adjustable height (as described in Table 55)
8. Hole for rough-adjustment bolt
9. Hex bolt connecting cabinet and adjustable base
10. Upper frame
Steps of Cabinet
Installation on Raised Floor
(with Adjustable
Base)
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
210 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The adjustable base has the upper frame and lower frame. They are connected through six rough-adjustment bolts. The rough-adjustment bolts locations determine the rough-adjustment level of the base height. The fine-adjustment holder conducts the fine adjustment of the adjustable base height within each rough-adjustment level.
Note: If the base height is out of the range listed in the table (i.e. less than 160 mm or more than 460 mm), make the fixed base according to the accurate height got from the project survey. The adjustable height refers to the height between the cabinet bottom and the concrete floor.
For adjustable base with height of 160 mm-260 mm, the relations between the base heights and the rough-adjustment bolt positions are listed in Table 55.
T AB L E 55 R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N T H E B AS E H E I G H T S AN D T H E R O U G H -AD J U S T M E N T B O L T P O S I T I O N S O F T H E AD J U S T AB L E B A S E W I T H H E I G H T O F 160 M M -260 M M
Rough-Adjustable Bolt Position
Adjustable-Height Mark
Base Height Range (Unit: mm)
The first hole for rough-adjustment bolt
160-185 160-185
The second hole for rough-adjustment bolt
185-210 185-210
The third hole for rough-adjustment bolt
210-235 210-235
The fourth hole for rough-adjustment bolt
235-260 235-260
Note: The holes for rough-adjustment bolts are numbered top-down. The adjustable-height mark refers to the silkscreen on inside of upper frame of the base.
For adjustable base with height of 260 mm-460 mm, the relations between the base heights and the rough-adjustment bolt positions are listed in Table 56.
T AB L E 56 R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N T H E B AS E H E I G H T S AN D T H E R O U G H -AD J U S T M E N T B O L T P O S I T I O N S O F T H E AD J U S T AB L E B A S E W I T H H E I G H T O F 260 M M -460 M M
Rough-Adjustable Bolt Position
Adjustable-Height Mark
Base Height Range (Unit: mm)
The first hole for rough-adjustment bolt
260-285 260-285
The second hole for rough-adjustment bolt
285-310 285-310
The third hole for rough-adjustment bolt
310-335 310-335
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 211
Rough-Adjustable Bolt Position
Adjustable-Height Mark
Base Height Range (Unit: mm)
The fourth hole for rough-adjustment bolt
335-360 335-360
The fifth hole for rough-adjustment bolt
360-385 360-385
The sixth hole for rough-adjustment bolt
385-410 385-410
The seventh hole for rough-adjustment bolt
410-435 410-435
The eighth hole for rough-adjustment bolt
435-460 435-460
Note: The holes for rough-adjustment bolts are numbered top-down. The adjustable-height mark refers to the silkscreen on inside of upper frame of the base.
1. Dismount its feet before erecting the cabinet.
2. Select the adjustable base of appropriate type from Table 54 according to the cabinet depth and the distance from the concrete floor to the raised floor surface.
3. Adjust the position of rough-adjustment bolts according to the adjustable-height mark, and fasten the bolts so as to make the base height meet the height requirements.
4. Mark the base installation holes on the concrete ground according to the hole positions as shown in Figure 84.
5. Drill four Φ16 mm round holes of 75 mm deep on the concrete ground at the installation hole positions using percussive drill.
6. Clean the dust and mud on the concrete ground, and insert four M12×100 expansion bolts into the holes and install the bolts.
7. Move the adjustable base to the installation position. Align the round holes on the lower frame of the adjustable base with the expansion bolts. Adjust the fine-adjustment holders, to make the adjustable base reach the desired height and level.
8. Lift the adjustable base up, insert the pressure plate through the expansion bolts, and let it press the fine-adjustment holder of the adjustable base.
9. After the four pressure plates hitched the expansion bolts and fine-adjustment holders, screw the flat washers, spring washers, nuts with the expansion bolts, and screw them after adjusting and confirming the position/level of the adjustable base.
10. Screw tightly the locking nuts on the fine-adjustment holders as shown in Figure 97, and fix the adjustable base.
11. Move the cabinet to the fixed adjustable base, align the installation holes at the cabinet bottom to the installation
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
212 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
holes on the top of the adjustable base, and also align horizontally the adjacent cabinet. Use the M12×40 hex bolts, flat washers, spring washers and nuts to connect the cabinet and the adjustable base tightly.
Note: If the cabinet slants during the cabinet fixing process, adjust the fine-adjustment holders. Remember to fasten the locking nut on the fine-adjustment holder after completing adjustment.
The installation of cabinet on raised floor with adjustable base is illustrated in Figure 98
F I G U R E 98 CAB I N E T I N S T AL L AT I O N O N R AI S E D FL O O R W I T H AD J U S T AB L E B AS E
1. Hex bolt 2. Cabinet
3. Adjustable base 4. Expansion bolt
5. Nut 6. Spring washer
7. Flat washer 8. Pressure plate
9. Concrete ground 10. Raised floor
END OF STEPS.
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 213
Top Fixing
To fix the cabinet by fixing its top on the cabling rack
1. Align the mounting holes at one end of the upper fixing board with the installation holes on the top of the cabinet. Then screw them tightly with M8×25 hex bolts, M8 nuts and washers.
2. Determine the vertical distance between the top of the cabinet and the cabling rack.
3. Fix the other end of the upper fixing board onto the cabling rack using M8 × 25 hex bolts, M8 nuts and washers.
4. Repeat step 1 through step 3 to fix the other upper fixing boards between the cabinet and cabling rack.
For each cabinet, four upper fixing boards are employed to fix the top.
For combined cabinet fixing and back-to-back fixing, select the number of fixing board according to actual situation.
Caution: In case of cabinet top fixing installation, make sure cable outlet hole on the cabinet top is unblocked.
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
214 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The top fixing of cabinet is shown in Figure 99.
F I G U R E 99 CAB I N E T I N S T AL L AT I O N I N TO P F I X I N G MO D E
1. Leading-out hole
2. Upper fixing board
3. Fixing bolt
4. Cabinet
END OF STEPS.
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 215
Side-by-Side Fixing
To fix cabinets side by side
Note: For the installation of multiple cabinets side by side, use connection boards to connect and fix the tops of the cabinets.
1. Select the number of connection boards according to actual situation.
2. Align the two installation holes on the connection board with screw holes which are used for combined cabinet fixing on the top of the cabinets, and fasten them with M8×25 hex bolts, nuts and washers, as shown in Figure 100.
F I G U R E 100 C AB I N E T I N S T AL L AT I O N I N C O M B I N E D C AB I N E T S F I X I N G M O D E
1. Cabinet
2. Connection board
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
216 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Back-to-Back Fixing
To fix cabinets back to back
Note: In case of back-to-back installation, connection boards are used to connect and fasten the tops of the cabinets.
1. Select the number of connection boards according to actual situation.
2. Align the installation holes on the connection board with screw holes on the top of the cabinets, and fasten them with M8×25 hex bolts, nuts and washers, as shown in Figure 101.
F I G U R E 101 C AB I N E T I N S T AL L AT I O N I N B AC K -T O -B AC K F I X I N G MO D E
1. Cabinet
2. Connection board
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 217
Installing Cabinet Doors Overview
After install the equipment in the cabinet, the cabinet doors should be mounted back.
Installing cabinet doors includes:
Installing front door
Installing back door
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
218 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Installing Front Door
To install the front door of the cabinet
1. Pull the upper and lower pivots downward until they are blocked against the pivot baffle.
2. Lift the front door and make a 90° angle between the front door and the cabinet.
3. Slant the front door outward slightly and align the pivot hole at the bottom of the front door with the pivot pin at the bottom of the cabinet. Put down the front door slowly, as shown in Figure 102.
F I G U R E 102 IN S T AL L I N G FR O N T D O O R (1 )
1. Door Pivot
2. Pivot baffle
3. Pivot hole
4. Pivot pin
Purpose
Steps
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 219
4. When the pivot pin enters the pivot hole completely, slowly push the front door till it is upright, as shown in Figure 103.
F I G U R E 103 IN S T AL L I N G FR O N T D O O R (2 )
5. When the front door is in the upright position, turn the upper and the lower pivots off the pivot baffle and place them into the pivot sleeves on the cabinet.
6. At last, connect the grounding cable of the front door to the grounding terminal on the front door and the installation of the front door is completed, as shown in Figure 104.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
220 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 104 IN S T AL L I N G FR O N T D O O R (3 )
1. Pivot sleeve
2. Door pivot
3. Pivot baffle
4. Grounding terminal on the front door
END OF STEPS.
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 221
Installing Back Door
To install the back door of the cabinet
1. Lift the back door, slant it outward slightly, and align the locating hole on the bottom of back door with the locating pin on the cabinet.
2. Put down the back door slowly to insert the locating pin into the locating hole, as shown in Figure 105.
F I G U R E 105 IN S T AL L I N G T H E B AC K D O O R (1 )
1. Locating hole
2. Locating pin
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
222 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
3. When the locating pin enters the locating hole completely, slowly push the back door till it is upright, as shown in Figure 106.
F I G U R E 106 IN S T AL L I N G T H E B AC K D O O R (2 )
4. Push the back door and keep it upright and fit with the cabinet.
Appendix B Introduction to ZTE Transmission Cabinet
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 223
5. Fix the back door on the cabinet with screws to complete the installation of the back door, as shown in Figure 107.
F I G U R E 107 IN S T AL L I N G T H E B AC K D O O R (3 )
END OF STEPS.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
224 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Cabinet Installation Requirements The following lists the installation requirements which should be met while installing and fix the cabinet:
The cabinet should be upright and firm.
The horizontal/vertical deviation should not exceed 0.1% of the cabinet height.
All the fastening components should be completely and firmly assembled.
When multi cabinets are arranged side by side, the horizontal/vertical deviation should not exceed 0.1% of the cabinet height, and the interspaces among the cabinets should be even and no greater than 3 mm.
Reinforce the equipment for quakeproof if the equipment is placed in the equipment room with high quakeproof requirements.
At lease three persons should cooperate to move/lift the cabinet during installing/fixing the cabinet.
Warning: Drilling holes on the cabinet without permission is prohibited. The holes which not meet the requirements can damage the wire connections and cables inside the cabinet. The metal crumbs produced by drilling may result in short circuit once they enter the cabinet.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 225
A p p e n d i x C
SDH NE Address Definition and Route Configuration
This appendix describes how to set the NE IP address and EMS host IP address. The content in this appendix is applicable to all SDH NEs.
Definition of NE IP Address Overview
The definition of the NE IP address is the same as that of common IP address. However, the meaning of each byte in NE IP address is redefined. The configuration principle and byte meanings vary with different mask format.
Two kinds of subnet mask format can be used for the definition of NE IP address:
FLSM addressing: Full Length Subnet Mask addressing
VLSM addressing: Variable Length Subnet Mask
VLSM addressing can be used together with CIDR (Classless Inter-Domain Routing) to define NE IP address for ZTE’s SDH equipment, which can greatly save the IP address resource.
Note: Only equipment with specific versions support the VLSM addressing and CIDR. Consult ZTE maintenance personnel for detailed version information.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
226 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Caution: While configuring initial information of NE, the IP addresses of this NE and corresponding EMS host should be determined and written to the NE NCP unit, which allows no random modification when the equipment operates normally.
FLSM Addressing
NE IP Address
The NE IP address contains three parts: area ID, NE ID, and NCP ID.
The format of NE’s IP address is as follows:
byte1. byte2. byte3. byte4
Explanation: The byte1 serves as the area ID, some bits of byte2 and byte3 serve as the NE ID, and the remaining address bits and byte4 forms the NCP ID.
The combination of area ID and NE ID corresponds to the network address. The NCP ID corresponds to the host address.
NE Subnet Mask
The format of NE’s subnet mask is as follows:
255. byte2. byte3. 0
The result got from the logic AND operation of NE IP address and subnet mask is used to define the specific meaning of each byte in the NE IP address.
Area ID
Area ID is used to indicate the area to which the NE belongs.
It is byte1 in the NE IP address (byte1. byte2. byte3. byte4), that is a number ranging from 1 to 223.
Note:
Area 192 is defined as the backbone area that connects to other areas. Normally, it is recommended to use the area IDs ranging from 193-201 for non-backbone areas.
Non-backbone areas communicate with each other via the backbone area. There is no any other form of connection among non-backbone areas.
It is not recommended to define more than 64 NEs in one area. The maximum allowable number of NEs in a single area is 128.
Definition of NE IP Address
and Subnet Mask
Definition of Area ID/
NE ID/ Board ID
Appendix C SDH NE Address Definition and Route Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 227
NE ID
NE ID is the result got from the logic AND operation of byte2, byte3 of the NE IP address and corresponding bytes in the subnet mask.
Note: In the same area, each NE must have a unique NE ID.
Board ID
The ID of NCP unit can be regarded as the host ID of an NE. It is the reverse code of the result got from the logic AND operation of byte2, byte3, byte4 of the NE IP and corresponding bytes in the subnet mask.
Note:
The ID of NCP should be defined manually. The IDs of other boards in the same NE are automatically allocated according to the ID of NCP.
IDs of different boards in the same NE must be unique, while those in different NEs can be the same.
The ID of NCP should range from 9 to 100, and 18 is recommended.
Table 57 shows the meaning of each byte in the NE IP address in case of different subnet mask.
T AB L E 57 M E AN I N G S O F B Y T E S I N T H E NE IP AD D R E S S
NE IP Address Subnet Mask Description
255.255.255.0
byte1 is area ID
byte2 and byte3 form NE ID
byte4 is NCP ID byte1. byte2. byte3. byte4
255.255.0.0
byte1 is area ID
byte2 is NE ID
byte3 and byte4 form NCP ID
Suppose there are three NEs: NE1, NE2 and NE3. When different subnet masks are used, their NE IP addresses are allocated as listed in Table 58.
T AB L E 58 NE IP AD D R E S S AL L O C AT I O N (FLSM)
NE IP Address Subnet Mask
NE 1 NE 2 NE 3
255.255.255.0 193.1.1.18 193.1.2.18 193.1.3.18
255.255.0.0 193.1.1.18 193.2.1.18 193.3.1.18
Example of NE IP Address
Allocation
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
228 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
VLSM Addressing
NE IP Address
It consists of three parts: area ID, ECC subnet ID, NE ID.
byte 1.byte 2.byte 3.byte 4
Each NE needs to be allocated with an IP address. In the same ECC subnet (an interconnected ECC network), the NE IP address must be unique.
NE Subnet Mask
The format of NE subnet mask is also “byte 1.byte 2.byte 3.byte 4”. It is the result got from the logic AND operation of subnet mask and NE IP address, used to define the specific meaning of each byte in the NE IP address.
“byte 1” is generally 255, and “byte 4” can be set randomly.
Area ID
Area ID is used to indicate the area to which the NE belongs.
It is byte1 in the NE IP address (byte1. byte2. byte3. byte4), that is a number ranging from 1 to 223.
For a complicated ECC subnet, the multiple areas should be configured due to the limitation of NE processing capability and the requirement of dynamic route protocol.
Note:
Area 192 is defined as the backbone area that connects to other areas. Normally, it is recommended to use the area IDs ranging from 193-201 for non-backbone areas.
Non-backbone areas communicate with each other via the backbone area. There is no any other form of connection among non-backbone areas.
It is not recommended to define more than 64 NEs in one area. The maximum allowable number of NEs in a single area is 128.
ECC Subnet ID
ECC subnet ID is used to indicate the ECC subnet to which the NE belongs to.
It is byte2 of NE IP address (byte1. byte2. byte3. byte4).
NE ID
NE ID is the result got from the logic AND operation of byte3, byte4 of the NE IP address and corresponding bytes of the subnet mask.
Definition of NE IP Address
and Subnet Mask
Definition of Area ID, ECC
Subnet ID and NE ID
Appendix C SDH NE Address Definition and Route Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 229
Suppose the subnet mask is 255.255.255.252, the NE addresses in the address space 193.193.193.* are allocated as follows: (63 NE addresses in total):
byte1.byte2.byte3.byte4
193.193.193.5
193.193.193.9
193.193.193.13
193.193.193.17
193.193.193.21
193.193.193.25
......
193.193.193.249
193.193.193.253
Suppose the number of available DCC overhead channels (count the channels of the installed board in the NE, including optical interfaces and electrical interfaces) of an NE is PortNum. One IP address should be defined for each optical/electrical interface.
If byte4 of the subnet mask is 0, the board IP address is allocated based on byte4 of the NE IP address.
Suppose the NE IP address, that is, the NCP IP address is “byte1.byte2.byte3.byte4”, then the IP addresses of other boards are allocated to numbers ranging from “byte1.byte2.byte3.(byte4+1)” to “byte1.byte2.byte3. (byte4+PortNum)”.
If byte4 of the subnet mask is not 0, the board IP address is allocated based on byte2 of the NE IP address.
Suppose the NE IP address is “byte1.byte2.byte3.byte4”, then the IP addresses of other boards are allocated to numbers ranging from “byte1.(byte2+1).byte3.byte4” to “byte1.(byte2+PortNum).byte3.byte4”.
Note: Since the NCP IP address is invisible on the EMS, it will not affect the outside network, which means it will not conflict with the outside network address. Therefore, it is only necessary to ensure that the addresses are unique inside the SDH internal communication network. In the same ECC network, the fourth byte of subnet mask being zero and being non-zero should not coexist.
Example of NE IP Address
Allocation
Definition of Board IP Address
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
230 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Example of NE Addressing Figure 108 shows the topology of a network.
F I G U R E 108 N E T W O R K TO P O L O G Y
1
2
5
8
43
6
EMS
Area 193
Area 192
Area 194
9
107
12
11
There are two schemes to allocate the network addresses using the FLSM technique.
Dividing areas according to Figure 108 can simplify connections between areas, and the NEs belonging to the backbone area are relatively few.
NEs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 8: they are relatively centralized, among which there are many connections, and they form a mesh topology. Therefore, they are allocated into area 193.
NEs 9, 11, and 12: they are relatively centralized and form a ring topology. Therefore, they are allocated into area 194.
NEs 7 and 10: there is only one single connection between areas 193 and 194 via NEs 7 and 10. Therefore, NEs 7 and 10 are taken out as the backbone area (area 192) for connecting other areas.
Description
Scheme 1
Appendix C SDH NE Address Definition and Route Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 231
Suppose the network mask is 255.255.255.0 and the EMS host address is 193.1.1.1. Table 59 lists the area definitions and NE IP address configurations.
T AB L E 59 AR E A D E F I N I T I O N S AN D NE IP AD D R E S S C O N F I G U R AT I O N S
Area NE NE IP Address
Access NE 1 193.1.1.18
NE 2 193.1.2.18
NE 3 193.1.3.18
NE 4 193.1.4.18
NE 5 193.1.5.18
NE 6 193.1.6.18
Area 193
NE 8 193.1.8.18
NE 9 194.1.9.18
NE 11 194.1.11.18 Area 194
NE 12 194.1.12.18
NE 7 192.1.7.18 Area 192 (backbone area) NE 10 192.1.10.18
Since the NEs in Figure 108 are relatively few, all the NEs can be simply allocated into one area, in which the backbone area is not needed.
For example, they may all be allocated into area 193. Suppose the network mask is 255.255.255.0 and the EMS host address is 193.1.1.1. Table 60 shows their NE addresses.
T AB L E 60 NE IP AD D R E S S C O N F I G U R AT I O N S O F T H E NE S AL L O C AT E D I N T O AR E A 193
NE NE IP Address NE NE IP Address
Access NE 1 193.1.1.18 NE 2 193.1.2.18
NE 3 193.1.3.18 NE 4 193.1.4.18
NE 5 193.1.5.18 NE 6 193.1.6.18
NE 7 193.1.7.18 NE 8 193.1.8.18
NE 9 193.1.9.18 NE 10 193.1.10.18
NE 11 193.1.11.18 NE 12 193.1.12.18
Note: Although allocating all NEs into the same area is simple, the efficiency of ECC route algorithm will be affected if the number of NEs is large. Therefore, this method only applies to applications with a small number of NEs. Normally, the maximum number of NEs in one area should not exceed 120.
Scheme 2
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
232 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Address/Route Configuration of EMS Host In order to enable EMS to manage all the NEs in network properly, it is necessary to configure the EMS host and the IP routes that can reach the whole network.
EMS Host Address Configuration
The EMS host address include the EMS host IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address, as defined in Table 61.
T AB L E 61 D E F I N I T I O N O F EMS H O S T AD D R E S S
Item Description
IP address It is the network address of EMS host, in the format of byte1.byte2.byte3.byte4.
Subnet mask It is used to divide network section by performing logic AND operation with the EMS host IP address.
Gateway address It is gateway address of the EMS host.
Table 62 describes the configuration principle of EMS host address.
T AB L E 62 C O N F I G U R AT I O N P R I N C I P L E O F EMS H O S T AD D R E S S
Item Configuration Principle
IP address
The result got from the logic AND operation of the EMS host IP address and the subnet mask must be within the same network section as the access NE, i.e. the EMS host and the gateway NE should have the same network ID.
The EMS host ID should be less than the gateway NE host ID (i.e. the NCP unit number). The EMS host ID is suggested to range from 1 to 9, starting from 1.
Subnet mask The subnet mask is suggested to be the same as the subnet mask of the access NE.
Gateway address Set the access NE as the gateway NE.
Definition of EMS Host
Address
Configuration Principle of
EMS Host Address
Appendix C SDH NE Address Definition and Route Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 233
Example: Consider the network shown in Figure 108, bind an IP address 193.1.1.1 which is within the same network section as gateway NE 1, with the network adapter of EMS host; thus ensuring that EMS host can reach the access NE.
Define the gateway NE address as 193.1.1.18, thus ensuring that EMS host can reach the area 193.
Set the routes on the EMS host to reach NEs in area 192 and area 194.
Route Configuration
There are two methods to configure the routes on the EMS:
Run the OSPF dynamic routing protocol at the EMS host
This method requires no route setting. However, be cautious when using dynamic route and do not advertise those invalid or possibly repeated routes to the network, to avoid some unreachable NEs or too large routing table. In addition, the application of dynamic route increases the operating load of EMS host.
Note: It is recommended to set static route or default route for the EMS host, so as to filter out IP packets that are irrelevant to the network, thus increases the operating efficiency of EMS.
Set default route or static route directing to the NE that directly connects with the EMS host. Delete other routes that are repeatedly configured.
As an example, consider the network shown in Figure 108, the method of setting default route or static route for the EMS host is as follows:
i. Set the default route
route add default 193.1.1.18
This default route means that all IP packets, without showing route locally, have to pass NE 1.
ii. Set static routes
route add 193.1.0.0 mask 255.255.0.0 193.1.1.18
route add 194.1.0.0 mask 255.255.0.0 193.1.1.18
route add 192.1.0.0 mask 255.255.0.0 193.1.1.18
The three static routes mean that all IP packets accessing the networks 193.1, 194.1, and 192.1 shall pass NE 1.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
234 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Route Configuration Commands
Windows operating system has different route configuration commands from the UNIX operating system.
Table 63 lists the route configuration commands commonly used in Windows 2000.
T AB L E 63 R O U T E C O N F I G U R AT I O N C O M M AN D S I N W I N D O W S 2000
Operation Purpose Command Line
Add default route route add 0.0.0.0 mask 0.0.0.0 193.1.1.18
Add route route add 193.1.0.0 mask 255.255.0.0 193.1.1.18
Add permanent route route add –p 193.1.0.0 mask 255.255.0.0 193.1.1.18
Delete route route delete 193.1.0.0 mask 255.255.0.0 193.1.1.18
View route route print
Check if the destination NE is reachable
ping 192.1.7.18
View all the NEs along the route
tracert 192.1.7.18
Caution: Once the computer is restarted, all the routes added by the “route add” command will be lost. Use the “route add –p” command if you want to add one route to the computer permanently.
In UNIX operating system, route configuration can be completed through using command line or modifying configuration file.
Command line
Table 64 lists the command lines commonly used to set route in UNIX.
T AB L E 64 R O U T E C O N F I G U R AT I O N C O M M AN D S L I N E S I N U N I X
Operation Purpose Command Line
Add default route route add default 193.1.1.18 1
HP-UX route add 193.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 193.1.1.18 1
Add route
Solaris route add net 193.1.0.0 193.1.1.18 1
Delete route route delete 193.1.0.0
Route Configuration Commands in
Windows
Route Configuration Commands in
UNIX
Appendix C SDH NE Address Definition and Route Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 235
Operation Purpose Command Line
View route netstat
Check if the destination NE is reachable
ping 192.1.7.18
View all the NEs along the route
tracertroute 192.1.7.18
Caution: Once the computer is restarted, all the routes added by the command lines will be lost. Modify the configuration file and save the changes to permanently add one route to the computer.
Configuration file
In different UNIX systems, HP-UX and Solaris, the configuration file location and the modification operation are different.
HP-UX: Modify the “/etc/rc.config.d/netconf” file in the file editor. The configuration commands in the file will automatically take effect and be saved permanently after the system is restarted. Table 65 lists the route configuration commands in the configuration file.
T AB L E 65 R O U T E C O N F I G U R AT I O N C O M M AN D S I N C O N F I G U R AT I O N F I L E (HP-UX)
Operation Purpose
Contents in Configuration File Corresponding Command Line
Add default route
ROUTE_DESTINATION[0]="default"
ROUTE_MASK[0]=""
ROUTE_GATEWAY[0]= 193.1.1.18
ROUTE_COUNT[0]=1
ROUTE_ARGS[0]= ""
route add default 193.1.1.18 1
Add route
ROUTE_DESTINATION[1]=" 193.1.0.0 "
ROUTE_MASK[1]=" 255.255.0.0 "
ROUTE_GATEWAY[1]= 193.1.1.18
ROUTE_COUNT[1]=1
ROUTE_ARGS[1]=""
route add 193.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 193.1.1.18 1
Solaris: Modify the configuration files listed in Table 66 in the file editor. The configuration commands in the files will automatically take effect and be saved permanently after the system is restarted.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
236 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
T AB L E 66 R O U T E C O N F I G U R AT I O N C O M M AN D S I N C O N F I G U R AT I O N F I L E S (S O L AR I S )
File /etc/hosts
Function Set added IP address
Format IP_address Host_name Alias
Example
127.0.0.1 localhost loghost
192.192.1.1 hknttserver
192.192.66.1 hknttsdh
168.69.74.35 almftp
File Location /etc/netmasks
Function Set the subnet mask for the added IP address
Format Network_ID Subnet_mask
Example
192.192.1.0 255.255.255.0
192.192.66.0 255.255.255.0
168.69.74.0 255.255.255.0
File /etc/hostname.eri0
Function Set the active IP address
Format Host_name
Example hknttserver
File /etc/hostname.eri0:x
Function Set the logic IP address. One hostname.eri0:x file needs to be added for each added IP address (x starts from one)
Format Host_name
Example Define the file of /etc/hostname.eri0:1 as hknttsdh
Define the file of /etc/hostname.eri0:2 as almftp
File /etc/rc2.d/zteRouter
Function
Add static route. This file will be automatically loaded when the system starts. The file name is S96zteRouter. The name zteRouter can be defined at your will except existed file name in the /etc/rc2.d directory
Format route add [host|net] destination gateway
Example
route add net 192.192.0.0 –netmask 255.255.192.0 192.192.1.6 1
route add net 192.192.64.0 –netmask 255.255.192.0 192.192.66.18 1
route add net
File /etc/defaultrouter
Function Input the IP address to set the default gateway
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 237
A p p e n d i x D
Agent Program Upgrade
In this appendix, you will learn about:
Definition of DIP switches and BootROM states
Local upgrade of Agent programs for the ZXMP S200
Remote upgrade of Agent programs for the ZXMP S200
Overview Agent programs of the ZXMP S200 are divided into application program and logic program. Without the programs and corresponding configurations, the ZXMP S200 equipment cannot establish connection with the EMS host for network configuration and management. Therefore it is necessary to download Agent programs to the NCP unit of the main board for the ZXMP S200.
In addition, the MCU of the main board and that of other plug-in cards also have their application/logic programs. The upgrade procedures for them are similar to those for the NCP unit of the main board. This appendix focuses on the upgrade of Agent programs (application/logic) for the NCP unit on the main board of the ZXMP S200.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
238 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
DIP Switches on the SMB Board The BootROM chip of NCP unit may work in the Download state and the Running state, which are controlled by a 4-pin DIP switch marked as S3 on the main board PCB board.
Table 67 describes the functions and DIP switch status corresponding to these two BootROM states.
T AB L E 67 NCP S T AT E S AN D C O R R E S P O N D I N G D IP S W I T C H S T AT U S
BootROM State
Function DIP Switch
Download
In this state, Agent programs and configuration files can be download
After the main board being started or reset, the IP address is set to 192.192.192.11 with the subnet mask 255.255.255.0 by default
All pins of the DIP switch are set to “ON” position
Running In this state, the Agent programs are started
Some pin(s) are set to “ON” position, the other(s) are set to non-ON position
Note: In the Running state, restarting or resetting the NCP unit and pressing the ring trip button (B.OFF) on the front panel of the main board for long time can make the NCP unit turn into the Download state.
Appendix D Agent Program Upgrade
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 239
Local Upgrade Flow of Local Upgrade
Local upgrade is to upgrade the application/logic program at the location of the equipment. The local upgrade flow is shown in Figure 109.
F I G U R E 109 LO C AL U P G R A D E FL O W C H AR T O F ZXMP S200
Start
Clear the database
Prepare for upgrade
Download the application/logicprogram
Upgrade the application/logicprogram
Verify the application/logicprogram
Use telnet
End
Download the database
Verify the version ofapplication/logic program in
the EMS
In the EMS
Use telnet
Use ftp
Flowchart
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
240 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Upgrade Preparations
The flow of local upgrade preparations is shown in Figure 110.
F I G U R E 110 FL O W C H AR T O F LO C AL U P G R AD E P R E P AR AT I O N S
Confirm the BootROM chip is correct and the CF card is ready
Enter the Download state
Set the EMS IP address
Check the equipment status and network connection status
ping 192.192.192.11
Is it the first time to use the CF card?
Format the CF card
Disconnected
Connected
Yes
No
Confirm the network cable between EMS and the Qx interface of NE is correctly connected
Is it necessary to reconfigure the NE information?
Clear the NCP database
Yes
No
Configure the NE information
Reset the NCP
Reset the NCP
Start
End
Flowchart
Appendix D Agent Program Upgrade
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 241
1. Confirm the BootROM chip is correct and the CF card is ready.
Make sure the correct BootROM chip is plugged into the position D55 on the main board PCB board, as each type of NCP unit can only use its own BootROM chip.
Make sure the CF card is correctly plugged on the SMB PCB board.
2. Set all pins of the DIP switch S3 on the main board PCB board to “ON” postion; or under the NCP Running state, restart/reset the NCP unit and press down the ring trip button for long time to enter the Download state. Then the NE IP address is set to 192.192.192.11 with the subnet mask 255.255.255.0.
3. Use a network cable to connect the Ethernet interface of EMS host with the Qx interface on the front panel of main board, and confirm the network cable connection is correct.
4. Set the IP address and subnet mask of the EMS computer according to the following rules:
IP address: 192.192.192.X (0 < X < 255 and X ≠ 11)
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
5. Execute the command ping 192.192.192.11 on the EMS computer to confirm that the EMS computer is connected with the NCP unit.
6. If the CF card is not used for the first time, and it is unnecessary to reconfigure the NE information, the upgrade preparations finish here.
If the CF card is not used for the first time, but it is necessary to reconfigure the NE information, proceed to Step 7.
If the CF card is used for the first time, proceed to Step 8.
7. Perform the following steps to clear the NCP database:
i. Execute the command telnet 192.192.192.11 on the EMS computer.
ii. The system prompts to enter user name and password which are both null, press ENTER till the prompt ZTE+> appears.
iii. Input the command d-erase –d1 under the prompt ZTE+> to clear the NCP database, where d1 represents for the NCP database area.
After clearing the NCP database, proceed to Step 9.
8. Perform the following steps to format the CF card:
i. Execute the command telnet 192.192.192.11 on the EMS computer.
Description
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
242 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
ii. The system prompts to enter user name and password which are both null, press ENTER till the prompt ZTE+> appears.
iii. Input the command format under the prompt ZTE+> to format the CF card.
Caution: The CF card contains critical configurations including NE IP address, MAC address, subnet mask, database information, and board configuration. Be cautious to use the format operation since it will clear all the data on CF card.
9. Input the command d-reboot to reset the NCP unit. If the reset is successful, the system will prompt “The connection with the host is lost”.
10. Configure the NE IP address, subnet mask, and MAC address
i. Input the command telnet 192.192.192.11 on the EMS computer. When the system prompts to enter user name and password which are both empty, press ENTER till the prompt ZTE+> appears.
ii. Input the command d-cfgnet under the prompt ZTE+> to configure the NE IP address, subnet mask, and MAC address. The input principles of each item are listed in Table 68. Input the command d-cfgnet –s to query the NE related information.
T AB L E 68 I N P U T P R I N C I P L E S O F NE R E L AT E D P AR AM E T E R S
Parameter Name
Input Principle Remarks
IP Address Input the IP address of the NE
Mandatory
Subnet Mask Input the subnet mask of the NE
Mandatory
MAC Address Input the physical address of the NE
Mandatory and unique for each NE
Warning: Each parameter must be entered. Press ENTER directly if there is no modification. Do not quit during the process, otherwise the NCP unit will stay in the infinite waiting state.
iii. The configuration is completed. The system will display the newly configured NE address.
Appendix D Agent Program Upgrade
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 243
iv. Save the configuration according to system prompt.
11. Input the command d-reboot to reset the NCP unit, and the new NE IP address will immediately take effect.
END OF STEPS.
Clearing the Database
To clear the NCP database before downloading programs.
Note: If the NE data has been cleared during the upgrade preparation, skip this step
1. Execute the command telnet 192.192.192.11 on the EMS computer.
2. The system prompts to enter the user name and password which are both null. Press ENTER directly until the prompt ZTE+> appears.
3. Input the command d-erase –d1 to clear the database.
END OF STEPS.
Downloading the Application/Logic Programs
To download the application/logic program to the CF card
1. Execute the command ftp 192.192.192.11 under the directory containing the application/logic program on the EMS computer.
2. When the system prompts to input the username and password which are both null, press ENTER until the prompt ftp> appears.
3. Execute the following commands under the ftp> prompt, to transfer the application/logic program to the NCP unit.
ftp> bin //Set the file transfer mode to binary mode
ftp> put file name //Transfer the application/logic program
ftp> ls –l //Check if the size of the downloaded file is consistent with that of the local file. If not, re-download the file
ftp> bye //Exit ftp connection
Purpose
Steps
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
244 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Caution: The application program of NCP unit must be named as “NCP***.BIN”, and the logic program must be named as “NCP***.FPZ” or “NCP***.RBF”. Otherwise the automatic download cannot be implemented. The file extension name can be either lowercase or uppercase.
END OF STEPS.
Upgrading the Application/Logic Program
To send the new application/logic program on the CF card to the application program section and logic program section in corresponding chip of the NCP unit.
1. Execute the command telnet 192.192.192.11. When the system prompts to input the username and password which are both null, press ENTER directly until the prompt ZTE+> appears.
2. Execute the command d-upgrade under the ZTE+> prompt, to upgrade the application/logic program.
Note: The command format is as follows.
d-upgrade [Subrack NO.] [Slot NO.] [Card-CPU-NO.] -p Application program file name\-f Logic program file name
The parameters in the command are described in Table 69.
T AB L E 69 P AR AM E T E R S O F T H E C O M M AN D D -U P G R AD E
Parameter Parameter Value
Subrack NO. It is used to define the serial number of the subrack. Generally, it is set to “1”.
Slot NO.
The serial number of the unit to be upgraded.
For the NCP unit of the main board (SMB), it is “1”;
For the MCU of the main board (SMB), it is “2”;
For a plug-in card in the ZXMP S200, it is “11”
Card CPU NO. It is generally set to “1”.
-p Upgrade the application program, followed with the file name
-f Upgrade the logic program, followed with the file name
Purpose
Steps
Appendix D Agent Program Upgrade
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 245
Example: Suppose the application file name is NCP-ZXMPS200-PRG-V1.00R1P05.BIN, execute the following command:
ZTE+>d-upgrade 1 1 1 –p NCP-ZXMPS200-PRG-V1.00R1P05.BIN
Continue with the follow-up upgrade operations as prompted. The operation interface is shown in Figure 111.
F I G U R E 111 IN T E R F AC E F O R LO C AL U P G R AD E O F NCP AP P L I C AT I O N
END OF STEPS.
Verifying the Application/Logic Program
To verify the application/logic program loaded into the chip
1. Execute the command telnet 192.192.192.11.
2. When the system prompts to input the username and password which are both empty, press ENTER directly until the prompt ZTE+> appears.
3. Execute the command d-get-status under the ZTE+> prompt, to verify if the application/logic program version is correct.
Note: The command format is as follows.
d-get-status Subrack-NO. Slot-NO. Card-CPU-NO.
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
246 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The parameters of the command are described in Table 70.
T AB L E 70 P AR AM E T E R S O F T H E C O M M AN D D -G E T -S T AT U S (ZXMP S200)
Parameter Value
Subrack-NO. It is used to define the serial number of the subrack. Generally, it is set to “1”.
Slot-NO.
The serial number of the unit to be upgraded.
For the NCP unit of the main board (SMB), it is “1”;
For the MCU of the main board (SMB), it is “2”;
For a plug-in card in the ZXMP S200, it is “11”
Card-CPU-NO. It is generally set to “1”.
The fields in the version status that need to be verified are described in Table 71.
T AB L E 71 F I E L D S T H AT N E E D T O B E V E R I F I E D F O R LO C AL U P G R AD E
Field Description
file type “program” indicates the application program area, while “fpga” indicates logic program (FPGA) area
download date * Time when files are downloaded
download version * Version of downloaded files
try-run type Changes to reserved.
status “master” indicates the master state
upgrade database “NO” indicates that the database is not upgraded
start address “0x0A000000” indicates the initial address of the program
file length * File size
try-run elapsed time Changes to “reserved”
try-run remained time Changes to “reserved”
Note: The fields marked with “*” Should be consistent with the actual value when the file is downloaded.
4. If the version is wrong, it is necessary to re-download the application/logic program and upgrade it.
END OF STEPS.
Appendix D Agent Program Upgrade
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 247
Downloading the Database
To download the data saved on the EMS to the NCP
Note: It is unnecessary to download the database when upgrading the logic program.
1. Set some pins of the DIP switch S3 to “ON” position and the others to “non-ON” position, to reset the main board. The NCP unit enters the Running state.
Note: If the NCP unit is set to the Download state by pressing the ring trip button, press the reset button (N.RST) on the main board to make the NCP unit enter the Running state.
2. Set the IP address of EMS computer which should be in the same network section as the NE’s IP address.
3. Ping the NE and make sure the communication between the NE and the EMS is normal.
4. In the EMS client operation window, select the NE (ZXMP S200) to be upgraded, and click the menu System -> NCP data Management -> DB Download to download all the databases via the EMS software.
END OF STEPS.
Verifying the Version of Application/Logic Program in EMS
To verify the version of downloaded application/logic program on the EMS
1. Double click the NE that has been upgraded in the ZXONM E300 EMS, to open the Card Management dialog box.
2. Right click the NCP unit in the dialog box and select Card Special Version from the pop-up shortcut menu.
3. The Card Special Version dialog box pops up and displays the version of application/logic program version in the NCP unit.
4. If the information displayed is consistent with the downloaded application/logic program version, it indicates that the newly downloaded application/logic program is running normally.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
248 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Remote Upgrade Flow of Remote Upgrade
The remote upgrade flow is shown in Figure 112.
F I G U R E 112 R E M O T E U P G R AD E FL O W C H AR T O F T H E ZXMP S200
Use telnet
In the EMS
End
Prepare for upgrade
Download the application/logicprogram
Upgrade the application/logicprogram
Try run the upgraded application/logic program
Verify the upgraded application/logic program
Verify the application/logic programafter try run
Activate the upgraded application/logic program
Verify the activatd application/logicprogram
Download the database
Verify the applciation/logic programin the EMS
Use ftp
Start
Flowchart
Appendix D Agent Program Upgrade
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 249
Note: It is unnecessary to upgrade the logic program of the NCP unit on the main board of the ZXMP S200.
Remote upgrade is to upgrade the application/logic program of an NE in its Running state.
Upgrade Preparations
To complete necessary preparations before remote upgrade
1. Connect the Ethernet interface of EMS computer to the Qx interface on the front panel of the main board in the ZXMP S200 with a network cable. Check and make sure that the network cable is connected correctly.
2. Set the IP address of the EMS computer, which should be in the same network section as the NE’s IP address.
3. Set some pins of the DIP switch S3 to “ON” position and the others to “non-ON” position, so as to make the NCP unit enter the Running state.
4. Ping the NE on the EMS computer to check whether the EMS is communicated with the NE normally and whether the ECC is available for program upgrade.
5. Check and make sure that the program to be downloaded has the version consistent with the version that can be managed by the current EMS.
6. Set some pins of the DIP switch S4 on the main board PCB to “ON” position and the others to “non-ON” position if the application/logic program of the MCU needs to be downloaded.
END OF STEPS.
Downloading the Application/Logic Program
To download the application/logic program
1. Execute the command ftp NE-IP-Address under the directory which contains the application/logic program.
2. Input the user name of zte and password of ecc when prompted.
3. Press ENTER until the prompt ftp> appears.
Purpose
Steps
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
250 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
4. Execute the following commands under the ftp> prompt, to download the application/logic program:
ftp> bin //Set the file transfer mode to binary mode
ftp> put file name //Download the application/logic program. If the prompt ftp> appears again, it indicates that the file transfer is completed
ftp> ls –l //Check if the size of downloaded file is consistent with the local file. If not, re-download the file
ftp> bye //Exit ftp connection
Caution: The application/logic program must be transferred to the NCP unit under the binary transfer mode. The application program file must be named as “NCP***.BIN”, and the logic program file must be named as “NCP***.FPZ” or “NCP***.RBF”. Otherwise, the automatic download cannot be implemented. The extension name of the files can be either lowercase or uppercase.
END OF STEPS.
Upgrading the Application/Logic Program
To upgrade the application/logic program
1. Execute the command telnet NE-IP-Address.
2. Input the user name of zte and password of ecc when prompted.
3. Press ENTER until the prompt ZTE+> appears.
Caution: If it is to upgrade the application/logic program of the MCU, execute the sping 1 2 1 command first before executing the telnet command, so as to check if the S interface between the NCP unit and the MCU is normal. Only when the communication is normal, can the upgrade operation be continued.
Purpose
Steps
Appendix D Agent Program Upgrade
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 251
4. Execute the command d-upgrade under the ZTE+> prompt, to load the application/logic program.
The command format is as follows:
d-upgrade Subrack-NO. Slot-NO. Card-CPU-NO. -p Application program file name\-f Logic program file name
The parameters in the command are described in Table 69.
END OF STEPS.
Verifying the Upgraded Application/Logic Program
To verify if the version of the upgraded application/logic program in the standby area is normal
1. Execute the command d-get-status under the prompt of ZTE+> .
Note:
The format of this command is as follows:
d-get-status Subrack-NO. Slot-NO. Card-CPU-NO.
The parameters of the command are described in Table 70.
2. After the upgrade, some fields in the standby area should be verified as listed in Table 72.
T AB L E 72 F I E L D S I N T H E S T AN D B Y AR E A T H AT N E E D T O B E V E R I F I E D
Field Name Field Description
file type “program” indicates the application program area, while “fpga” indicates logic program (FPGA) area
download date [Note] Time when files are downloaded
download version [Note] Version of downloaded files
try-run type Changes to reserved.
status “master” indicates the master state, while “slave” indicates the standby state
upgrade database “NO” indicates that the database is not upgraded
start address Initial address of the program
file length [Note] File size
try-run elapsed time Changes to “reserved”
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
252 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Field Name Field Description
try-run remained time Changes to “reserved”
Note:
The field “download date” should be consistent with the actual time when the file is downloaded.
The field “download version” should be consistent with the actual downloaded file version.
The field “file length” should be consistent with the actual downloaded file size.
3. If the version is wrong, it is necessary to re-download the application/logic program and re-upgrade it.
END OF STEPS.
Try Run of the Application/Logic Program
To try run the application/logic program
1. Execute the d-try command under the prompt ZTE+> to perform the try run of the application/logic program in the standby area.
The format of this command is as follows:
d-try Subrack-NO. Slot-NO. Card-CPU-NO. -p application program file name\-f logic program file name
The parameters in the command are described in Table 73.
T AB L E 73 PAR AM E T E R S O F T H E C O M M AN D D -T R Y (ZXMP S200)
Parameter Value
Subrack-NO. It is used to define the serial number of the subrack. Generally, it is set to “1”.
Slot-NO.
The serial number of the unit to be upgraded.
For the NCP unit of the main board (SMB), it is “1”;
For the MCU of the main board (SMB), it is “2”;
For a plug-in card in the ZXMP S200, it is “11”
Card-CPU-NO. It is generally set to “1”.
-p Try run the application program, followed with the file name
-f Try run the logic program, followed with the file name
Purpose
Steps
Appendix D Agent Program Upgrade
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 253
2. During the process of executing the command d-try, the system will prompt: Do you want to upgrade the DB area?Yes[y]/No[n]
Input y: clear the NCP database
Input n: not clear the NCP database
3. Input y. When the execution of d-try command completes, the NCP unit will be reset automatically.
END OF STEPS.
Verifying the Application/Logic Program After Trial Run
To verify if the version of the application/logic program in the standby area is normal after the trial run.
1. Execute the telnet NE-IP-Address command on the EMS computer
2. Input the user name of zte and password of ecc when prompted.
3. Press ENTER until the prompt ZTE+> appears.
4. Execute the command d-get-status under the prompt of ZTE+>.
The format of this command is as follows:
d-get-status Subrack-NO. Slot-NO. Card-CPU-NO.
The parameters in the command are described in Table 70.
5. Check the fields in the standby area that need to be verified as described in Table 74.
T AB L E 74 D E S C R I P T I O N S O F F I E L D S I N T H E S T AN D B Y AR E A T H AT N E E D T O B E V E R I F I E D AF T E R T H E TR Y R U N
Field Description
file type “program” indicates the application program area, while “fpga” indicates logic program (FPGA) area
download date [Note] Time when files are downloaded
download version [Note] Version of downloaded files
try-run type “try-run” indicates that the program is in trial run
status “try-run” indicates the try-run state
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
254 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Field Description
upgrade database
“YES” indicates that the database is upgraded
“NO” indicates that the database is not upgraded
start address “0x0A400000” indicates the initial address of the program
file length [Note] File size
try-run elapsed time Elapsed time of the try-run
try-run remained time Remaining time of the try-run
Note:
The field “download date” should be consistent with the result got in the upgrade verification
The field “download version” should be consistent with the result got in the upgrade verification
The field “file length” should be consistent with the result got in the upgrade verification
END OF STEPS.
Activating the Application/Logic Program
To activate the application/logic programs in the standby area.
1. Execute the d-active command under the prompt ZTE+>.
Note:
The format of this command is as follows:
d-active Subrack-NO. Slot-NO. Card-CPU-NO -p/-f
The parameters in the command are described in Table 75.
T AB L E 75 P AR AM E T E R S O F T H E C O M M AN D D - AC T I V E
Parameter Value
Subrack-NO. It is used to define the serial number of the subrack. Generally, it is set to “1”.
Slot-NO.
The serial number of the unit to be upgraded.
For the NCP unit of the main board (SMB), it is “1”;
For the MCU of the main board (SMB), it is “2”;
For a plug-in card in the ZXMP S200, it is “11”
Purpose
Steps
Appendix D Agent Program Upgrade
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 255
Parameter Value
Card-CPU-NO. It is generally set to “1”.
-p Activate the application program
-f Activate the logic program
2. If the application/logic programs are not activated within 15 minutes after the try-run, or they are not activated before resetting the NCP unit, the board will run the original application/logic programs.
END OF STEPS.
Verifying the Activated Application/Logic Program
To verify if the version of the activated application/logic programs in the original standby area is correct.
1. Execute the command d-get-status under the prompt ZTE+>.
The format of this command is as follows:
d-get-status Subrack-NO. Slot-NO. Card-CPU-NO.
2. After the activation, check the fields in the standby area which should be verified as listed in Table 76.
T AB L E 76 D E S C R I P T I O N S O F F I E L D S T H AT N E E D T O B E V E R I F I E D AF T E R AC T I V AT I O N
Field Description
file type “program” indicates the application program area, while “fpga” indicates logic program (FPGA) area
download date Time when files are downloaded
download version Version of downloaded files
try-run type Changes to “reserved”
status “master” indicates the master status
upgrade database
If “y” is selected to upgrade the NCP database during trail run, “NO” indicates that the database upgrade is finished;
If “n” is selected not to upgrade the NCP database during trail run, “NO” indicates that the database has not been upgraded.
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
256 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Field Description
start address “0x0A4000000” is the initial address of the program
file length File size
try-run elapsed time Changes to “reserved”
try-run remained time Changes to “reserved”
Note:
The field “download date” should be consistent with the result got in the upgrade verification
The field “download version” should be consistent with the result got in the upgrade verification
The “status” of the original master area should change to “slave”
The field “file length” Should be consistent with the result got in the upgrade verification
END OF STEPS.
Downloading the Database
To download the data saved on the EMS to the equipment
1. In the EMS client operation window, select the NE (ZXMP S200) to be upgraded
2. Click System -> NCP data Management -> DB Download menu.
3. Download the data to the equipment in the pop-up dialog box.
END OF STEPS.
Note:
The original database should be cleared before downloading the database. If the database has not been cleared as described in the section “Try Run of the Application/Logic Program”, you can use the command “telnet NE IP Address” to log on to the main board (the login name is “zte” and the password is “ecc”). After successful login, input the command “a-clr-ncpdb” to clear the original database.
It is unnecessary to download the database while upgrading the logic program.
Purpose
Steps
Appendix D Agent Program Upgrade
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 257
Verifying the Version of Application/Logic Program in EMS
To verify the version of downloaded application/logic program on the EMS
1. Double click the NE (ZXMP S200) that has been upgraded in the ZXONM E300 EMS, to open the Card Management dialog box.
2. Right click the NCP in the dialog box, and select Card Special Version from the pop-up shortcut menu.
3. The Card Special Version dialog box pops up and displays the application/logic programs’ versions.
4. If the information displayed is consistent with the downloaded application/logic programs, it indicates that the newly downloaded application/logic programs are running normally.
END OF STEPS.
Purpose
Steps
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
258 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Precautions The NCP unit of the main board supports local and remote
upgrade of its application program but only support local upgrade of its logic programs.
The MCU unit of the main board and other plug-in cards support local and remote upgrade for both application and logic programs.
Make the preparations below before downloading the application or logic programs to the MCU of the main board:
i. Set the NCP unit to the Running state, that is, set some pins of the DIP switch S3 on the main board PCB to “ON” position and the others to “non-ON” position.
ii. Set the MCU state by setting some pins of the DIP switch S4 on the main board to “ON” position and the others to “non-ON” position.
On the EMS, the Card Management dialog box of the ZXMP S200 is as shown in Figure 113.
F I G U R E 113 C AR D M AN AG E M E N T D I AL O G B O X O F ZXMP S200
The slot #1 corresponds to the NCP unit, the units in slot #2 through slot #8 share the MCU of main board. Therefore, upgrading application/logic programs of any unit in slot #2 to slot #8 will upgrade all the units controlled by the MCU of the main board.
In some command, the parameters of Subrack-NO., Slot-NO., and Card-CPU-NO. may be used. They should be configured as follows:
Appendix D Agent Program Upgrade
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 259
Generally, the Subrack-NO. and Card-CPU-NO. are set to “1”.
The Slot-NO. is determined by the board to be upgraded.
For the NCP unit, it is “1”; for the MCU of the main board, it is “2”; for a plug-in card, it is “11”.
Take the d-get-status command as an example:
To query the state of the NCP unit on the main board, enter the command: d-get-status 1 1 1
To query the state of the MCU on the main board, enter the command: d-get-status 1 2 1
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
260 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
This page is intentionally blank.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 261
A p p e n d i x E
Common Instruments and Meters
This appendix introduces the meters (including the optical power meter, and chip burner) that are frequently used in routine maintenance. It covers their functions, operations, parameter setting, and operation precautions.
Note: Since the meters with similar functions have various models, the introduction in this appendix serves only as reference. For details on how to use the meters, refer to their instruction manuals.
PMS-1A Optic Power Meter Figure 114 shows the appearance of the PMS-1A optic power meter.
F I G U R E 114 AP P E AR AN C E O F T H E PMS-1 A OP T I C P O W E R M E T E R
Overview
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
262 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The PMS-1A optic power meter mainly serves to measure the continuous optical signal power, employing 4-digit LCD. It is capable of automatic measurement range switching, automatic power-off, automatic reset zero, multi-wavelength measurement and relative power measurement, etc. The specification of the PMS-1A is listed in Table 77.
T AB L E 77 S P E C I F I C AT I O N O F T H E PMS-1A OP T I C P O W E R M E T E R
Item Specification
Working wavelength 1300 nm, 1310 nm, 1480 nm or 1550 nm
Measurement range -40 dBm - +20 dBm (0.1 nW - 100 mW)
Measurement accuracy ±5%
Detector interface type FC
Figure 115 shows the panel of the PMS-1A optic power meter.
F I G U R E 115 P AN E L O F T H E PMS-1A OP T I C P O W E R M E T E R
WATT unit selectionbutton
Wavelength selectionbutton
CLEAR button Power switch
LCD
Relative measurementstatus switchover key
Detector interface
Socket for externalpower supply
dBm unit selectionbutton
Panel Description
Appendix E Common Instruments and Meters
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 263
Figure 116 shows the operation flow of measurement via the PMS-1A optic power meter, together with the specific operation in each step.
F I G U R E 116 OP E R AT I O N FL O W O F M E AS U R E M E N T W I T H T H E PMS-1A OP T I C P O W E R M E T E R
Press to select wavelength
Relative power measurement
Absolute power measurement
Press
Select unit
Select unit
Press to enter relative measurement
state
WATT
dBm
Press
Press
WATT
dBm
Press
Read measurement results
Press to clear all digits
Connect optical source to be tested with optical
power meter
Select measurement mode
Press to power on optic power meter
Remember to recharge the batteries in time.
Cover the detector before the clearing operation lest the light enter inside and affect the measurements.
Select an appropriate wavelength for the corresponding optical interface for measurement. To be specific, select the 1310 nm wavelength for the I.X, S-X.1 and L-X.1 optical interfaces, and select the 1510 nm wavelength for the S-X.2 and L-X.2 optical interfaces, where X represents the level of SDH signal, and X = 1, 4, 16, 64.
Operation Flow
Precautions
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
264 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
While using the meter, protect it from moisture, shake, dust, and heat source. Keep the detector and connector clean.
If the meter has been stored/used in low-temperature condition for a long time, and is to be used in high-temperature condition, put it in the high-temperature condition for some time before using lest the condensation damage it.
Appendix E Common Instruments and Meters
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 265
ALL-11 Chip Burner Figure 117 shows the appearance of the ALL-11 chip burner.
F I G U R E 117 AP P E AR AN C E O F T H E ALL-11 C H I P B U R N E R
The ALL-11 chip burner serves to burn E/EPROM, MCU/MPU, and PLD. It is connected with the PC through RS232C serial port or parallel port of the PC, and it is controlled by the special program installed in the Windows system. With the IC multi-tap or conversion socket, the ALL-11 chip burner is compatible with most of the present IC models and packages.
Overview
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
266 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Figure 118 shows the panel of the ALL-11 chip burner.
F I G U R E 118 P AN E L O F T H E ALL-11 C H I P B U R N E R
Power switch
BUSYGOOD YES
Power socket
Communication port
Power indicator
40-pin socket
YES shortcut key
Success indicator
Working indicator
Memory extension slot
The 40-pin socket definition is shown in Figure 119.
F I G U R E 119 S E C T I O N AL V I E W O F 40 -P I N S O C K E T
Extractor leverSocket
Jack
Chip insertion guide
Panel Description
Appendix E Common Instruments and Meters
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 267
Figure 120 shows the operation flow for burning a chip with ALL-11 chip burner. Before burning, make sure that the chip burner is connected with PC, the given burning software has been properly/successfully installed on PC, and the connection between the PC and chip burner has been established.
F I G U R E 120 OP E R AT I O N FL O W O F ALL-11 C H I P B U R N E R
Operation Flow
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
268 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
During the operation, observe the device indicator lights status and check whether it complies with the current operation. If any incompliance, pause the operation to find out the cause.
In the program, the chip manufacturer information, its type and model should be set as per actual chip. The file format should be set according to the format of actual file. The two common file formats are BIN and HEX. A file with the extension of BIN is binary file, and its file format should be selected as Binary. A file with the extension of HEX is hexadecimal file, and its file format should be selected as Intel HEX.
To insert the chip into the chip burner socket, ensure that pins are in the correct sequence by follow the Chip insertion guide shown in Figure 119. Usually, lower part of the chip should be aligned with the bottom of the socket.
Pull over the socket extractor lever before inserting the chip, and press it down after insertion. Make sure the chip’s pins are in reliable contact. Figure 119 shows the extractor levers positions.
Precautions
Appendix E Common Instruments and Meters
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 269
YGBERT-2M 2 M BER Tester The YGBERT-2M BER tester is a portable hand-held tester. Its appearance is shown in Figure 121.
F I G U R E 121 AP P E AR AN C E O F T H E YGBERT-2M BER TE S T E R
The YGBERT-2M BER tester is used to detect bit errors and monitor alarms for the PCM digital transmission system, fiber communication system, and digital microwave communication system. Its measurable rate level is 2 Mbit/s. The output of the code generator complies with ITU-T G.703 Recommendation. It permits line attenuation of 0 dB to 6 dB. It can insert a single bit error or periodic bit errors. Besides, it has the LEDs to indicate signal interruption, AIS, out of synchronization and bit errors, and provides the function of buzzer alarm.
Overview
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
270 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The panel of the YGBERT-2M BER tester is shown in Figure 122.
F I G U R E 122 P AN E L O F T H E YGBERT-2M BER TE S T E R
No signalAISNo syncBit Error
Start/Stop
Select
Setup
Tx Bit Error
G.821
BE/BER
Power1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
161718
No. Name
1 Power off
2 Power On/ Reset
3 Indicator of no input signal alarm
4 AIS alarm indicator
5 Out-of-Sync alarm indicator
6 Bit error alarm indicator
7 Enter/Exit parameter modification
8 Parameter/State modification
9 Moving cursor
Panel Description
Appendix E Common Instruments and Meters
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 271
No. Name
10 Start/Stop operation
11 BE/BER display conversion
12 G.821 analysis result display
13 Single BE Insertion
14 External power jack
15 LCD screen
16 Signal transmitting interface
17 Print interface
18 Signal receiving interface
The operation flow of the YGBERT-2M BER tester is shown in Figure 123.
F I G U R E 123 OP E R AT I O N FL O W O F T H E YGBERT-2M BER TE S T E R
Remember to recharge battery in time. The fully charged battery may be used for about 4 consecutive hours. In 24-hour bit error test, the external power supply must be used.
In testing the SDH equipment, the code pattern must be PRBS15.
Operation Flow
Precautions
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
272 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
SDH Tester Figure 124 shows the appearance of the Aglient OmniBer 718 (HP37718A) SDH tester.
F I G U R E 124 AP P E AR AN C E O F AG L I E N T O M N I BE R 718 SDH TE S T E R
External interface area
Alarm monitoring area
Key selection area
Test display window
Aglient OmniBer 718 serves to measure SDH optical interface parameters, PDH electric interface parameters, jitter parameters, and bit errors.
Alarm monitoring area
The alarm monitoring area is shown in Figure 125.
F I G U R E 125 AG L I E N T OM N I B E R 718 AL A R M M O N I T O R AR E A
Common alarmindication
PDH/DSNalarm indication
Jitter alarmindication
SDH/SONETalarm indication
Alarm related key
History alarmindicator
Key selection area
The key selection area is shown in Figure 126.
Overview
Panel Description
Appendix E Common Instruments and Meters
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 273
F I G U R E 126 AG L I E N T OM N I B E R 718 K E Y S E L E C T I O N AR E A
Hard key area
Print/outputarea
Direction selection keysPop-up menuselection keys
Soft key area
Test display window
Hard key area: Providing functions marked on the keys.
Print/output area: In sequence from the left to the right and from up to down are printing button, paper feeding button, external display interface and built-in printing interface.
Direction selection keys: Changing selected items in the test display window
Pop-up menu selection keys: Selecting a pop-up menu
Soft key area: Providing functions the corresponding functions indicated in the test display window.
Test display window
F I G U R E 127 AG L I E N T OM N I B E R 718 TE S T D I S P L AY W I N D O W AR E A
Transmitting settingwindow
Receiving settingwindow
Test resultssetting
window
OTHER andGRAPHsettingwindow
Soft keys and the related function selection
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
274 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
External interface area
The external interface area is located at the side of Aglient OmniBer 718. There are various optical and electrical interfaces distributed on the test area, each of which is marked with the interface name.
Note: Since the operation of the Aglient OmniBer 718 SDH tester is complicated, this section only introduces a simple error test process. For details of other index tests, please refer to the related documents of tester.
The test process of 24-hour bit error test is described as follows.
1. Establish connection between the boards and the tester according to the networking diagram.
2. In the transmitting setting window, set the rate level and mapping structure of optical launched signals.
3. In the receiving setting window, set the rate level and mapping structure of optical received signals.
4. Set the test time.
5. Return to the transmitting setting window, and click the soft key LASER ON in the test window to enable the laser of the SDH tester.
6. Press the key Run/Stop to start the error test.
7. 24 hours later, click Result to view the test results in the TROUBLE SCAN and SDH/PDH ERROR ANALYSIS of the result window.
8. If any error is displayed, check the optical line and troubleshoot any fault. Then test the bit error again till there is no error.
Before connecting an optical interface of the equipment or an instrument, make sure to shut down the laser.
In the test of the interconnection between the equipment and an instrument, make sure to connect the optical receive interface before connecting the corresponding optical transmit interface, or enable the laser after the connection is completed.
When the test is finished, make sure to disconnect the optical transmit interface of the equipment and the tester before disconnecting the corresponding optical receive interface, or switch off the laser before unplugging the pigtail.
Avoid looking into the pigtail end surface of the optical transmit interface.
When the pigtail connector for the optical transmit interface of the equipment and the tester is unplugged, make sure to cover the optical interface with a dust-proof cap to avoid any injury to human bodies.
Operation Flow
Precautions
Appendix E Common Instruments and Meters
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 275
Aglient OmniBer 718 is suitable for testing signals with a rate less than 2.5 G.
The measurable input optical power range of the Aglient OmniBer 718 is from -10 dBm to -30 dBm. The input overload optical power is -8 dBm.
Before a test, make sure the head of fiber pigtail should be clean, and optical interfaces and fiber pigtails of equipment or the tester in connection should be well coupled.
Press the 1st and 5th keys at the left side of the soft key area simultaneously to reset and initialize the testing instrument system.
To test SDH/PDH signals, different interfaces in the test interface area should be used for the access of different rate levels.
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
276 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
This page is intentionally blank.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 277
A p p e n d i x F
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Full Name
A
ADM Add-Drop Multiplexer
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
AU-n Administrative Unit, level n
AUG Administrative Unit Group
B
BBE Background Block Error
BER Bit Error
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply
B8ZS Bipolar with 8-Zero Substitution
B3ZS Bipolar with 3-Zero Substitution
C
CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
Corba Common object request broker architecture
CV Coding Violation
D
DCC Data Communications Channel
DDF Digital Distribution Frame
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
E
ECC Embedded Control Channel
EFT Electrical Fast Transient
EPL Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN Ethernet Private Local Area Network
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
278 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Abbreviation Full Name
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EUT Equipment Under Test
EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line
EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private Local Area Network
ES Errored Second
ESD Electro-Static Discharge immunity
F
FE Fast Ethernet
FEBBE Far End Background Block Error
FEES Far End Errored Second
FESES Far End Severely Errored Second
G
GFP Generic Framing Protocol
GNE Gateway Network Element
GUI Graphical User Interface
GSM Global System for Mobile communications
H
HDB3 High Density Bipolar of order 3
HDLC High level Digital Link Control
I
IC Integrated Circuit.
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IP Internet Protocol
ITU-T International Telecommunication
Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
L
LAN Local Area Network
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LST Link Status Transport
LOS Loss Of Signal
M
MAC Media Access Control
MCU Micro Control Unit
MSOH Multiplex Section OverHead
MS-PSC Multiplex Section - Protection Switching Count
MS-PSD Multiplex Section - Protection Switching Duration
Appendix F Abbreviations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 279
Abbreviation Full Name
MSTP Multiservice Transport Platform
N
NE Network Element
O
ODF Optical fiber Distribution Frame
P
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PGND Protection GND
PJC+ Positive Pointer Justification Count
PJC- Negative Pointer Justification Count
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PRBS Pseudo Random Binary Sequence
R
REG Regenerator
S
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SD Signal Degrade
SES Severely Errored Second
SFP Small Form Factor Pluggable
SF Signal Failure
SMCC Sub-network Management Control Center
SSM Synchronization Status Message
STM-N Synchronous Transport Module, level N (N=1, 4, 16, 64)
T
TCP Transfer Control Protocol
TM Terminal Multiplexer
TRK Trunk
TU-m Tributary Unit, level m
TUG-m Tributary Unit Group, level m
U
UAS Unavailable Second
UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply
V
VC-n Virtual Container, level n
VCXO Voltage Control Crystal Oscillator
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
280 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
This page is intentionally blank.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 281
Figures
Figure 1 Installation and Commissioning Flow of the ZXMP S200.......................................................................................3
Figure 2 Installation Preparation Flow...................................5
Figure 3 Wooden Packing Box of a Cabinet .......................... 11
Figure 4 Packaging of the Cabinet ...................................... 12
Figure 5 Packing Carton of the ZXMP S200.......................... 13
Figure 6 Removing the Packing Materials ............................ 13
Figure 7 Packing of Boards................................................ 14
Figure 8 Hardware Installation Flow of the ZXMP S200.......... 17
Figure 9 Wall-Mounted Bracket.......................................... 19
Figure 10 Location of Mounting HOles on the Wall ................ 20
Figure 11 Mounting the Bracket on Wall .............................. 20
Figure 12 Fixing the Chassis on the Bracket......................... 21
Figure 13 ZXMP S200 Chassis with ETSI Lugs ...................... 22
Figure 14 ZXMP S200 Chassis with IEC Lugs........................ 22
Figure 15 ZXMP S200 Chassis with Lugs for Rear Fixing ........ 22
Figure 16 Pushing the ZXMP S200 Chassis into ZTE Cabinet... 24
Figure 17 Two ZXMP S200 Chassis Mounted in ZTE Cabinet ... 24
Figure 18 Pushing the Main Board Into the Chassis............... 26
Figure 19 Unplugging the Main Board From the Chassis ........ 26
Figure 20 Installing the Dustproof Module ........................... 28
Figure 21 Format of the Site Label ..................................... 29
Figure 22 Site Label Example ............................................ 30
Figure 23 Format of Subrack Bar Code Label ....................... 31
Figure 24 Sticking Position of Subrack Bar Code Label .......... 31
Figure 25 Format of Fiber Pigtail Label................................ 32
Figure 26 Fiber Pigtail Label Example ................................. 33
Figure 27 Sticking Position of Fiber Pigtail Label ................... 34
Figure 28 Format of Cable Label ........................................ 34
Figure 29 Example of Cable Label ...................................... 36
Figure 30 Sticking Position of Cable Label ........................... 36
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
282 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Figure 31 Format of Power Cable Label ............................... 36
Figure 32 Power Cable Label Example................................. 37
Figure 33 Sticking Position of Power Cable Label .................. 37
Figure 34 Cable Length Label Format ................................. 38
Figure 35 Cable Length Label Example................................ 38
Figure 36 Cable Ties ........................................................ 46
Figure 37 Trimming Requirements of Cable Tie .................... 47
Figure 38 Cable Ties for Cable Strands ............................... 47
Figure 39 Cable Ties for the Turned Cable Strands ............... 47
Figure 40 Cable Layout Inside Cabinet................................ 48
Figure 41 Power Cable Layout ........................................... 49
Figure 42 Layout of E1 Cables ........................................... 50
Figure 43 Layout of Fiber Pigtails ....................................... 51
Figure 44 Layout of Network Cable/BITS Cable/Data Cable.... 52
Figure 45 Power Cable and Grounding Cable Connection of the ZXMP S200 in Joint Grounding Mode (1) .............................. 53
Figure 46 Power Cable and Grounding Cable Connection of the ZXMP S200 in Joint Grounding Mode (2) .............................. 54
Figure 47 Power Cable and Grounding Cable Connection of the ZXMP S200 in Independent Grounding Mode ........................ 55
Figure 48 -48 V/-60 V DC Power/Grounding Cable................ 55
Figure 49 +24 V DC Power/Grounding Cable ....................... 56
Figure 50 AC Power Cable................................................. 57
Figure 51 Protection Grounding Cable................................. 58
Figure 52 Structure of 75 Ω E1 Cable ................................. 59
Figure 53 Pins of the 50-Pin D-Type Plug ............................ 59
Figure 54 Structure of 120 Ω E1 Cable................................ 61
Figure 55 Structure of T1 Cable ......................................... 65
Figure 56 Structure of Network Cable ................................. 67
Figure 57 75 Ω BITS Cable................................................ 68
Figure 58 Structure of Alarm Output Cable.......................... 70
Figure 59 Structure of E3/T3 Cable .................................... 72
Figure 60 Structure of V.35 Cable ...................................... 73
Figure 61 Pins Layout of V.35 Cable Plug ............................ 74
Figure 62 AI Data Cable ................................................... 75
Figure 63 Pins Layout of AI Data Cable Plug ........................ 75
Figure 64 OW Data Cable.................................................. 77
Figures
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 283
Figure 65 Pins Layout of OW Data Cable Plug ...................... 77
Figure 66 SHDSL Cable .................................................... 79
Figure 67 First Power-On Check Flow.................................. 87
Figure 68 Power Supply Lightning Protection Connection in a Far-End Equipment Room .................................................. 94
Figure 69 Software Loopback Direction Definition for Optical Line Board..................................................................... 108
Figure 70 Software Loopback Direction Definition for Tributary Board ........................................................................... 109
Figure 71 Testing the Optical Launched Power ................... 111
Figure 72 Connection for Online Bit Error Test (Electrical Interface)...................................................................... 112
Figure 73 Connection for Online Bit Error Test (Optical Interface)................................................................................... 113
Figure 74 Connection for Offline Bit Error Test (Electrical Interface)...................................................................... 114
Figure 75 Connection for Offline Bit Error Test (Optical Interface)................................................................................... 114
Figure 76 Troubleshooting Flow ....................................... 141
Figure 77 Troubleshooting flow for Communication Fault ..... 156
Figure 78 Fault Category Determination Flow..................... 157
Figure 79 Loopback Level by Level ................................... 159
Figure 80 Dimensions of the ZTE Transmission Equipment Cabinet (300 mm Deep) .................................................. 186
Figure 81 Dimensions of the ZTE Transmission Equipment Cabinet (600 mm Deep) .................................................. 187
Figure 82 Cabinet Components........................................ 188
Figure 83 Cabinet Installation Flow .................................. 189
Figure 84 Marking Template of Cabinet (Unit: mm) ............ 194
Figure 85 Detaching the Front Door (1) ............................ 197
Figure 86 Detaching the Front Door (2) ............................ 198
Figure 87 Detaching the Back Door (1) ............................. 199
Figure 88 Detaching the Back Door (2) ............................. 200
Figure 89 Installation Hole Sizes on the Cabinet Top........... 201
Figure 90 Marking Template of Cabinet (Unit: mm) ............ 202
Figure 91 Cabinet Installation on Concrete Ground (Without Feet) ............................................................................ 203
Figure 92 Positions of Mounting Holes of a Pressure Plate .... 204
Figure 93 Cabinet Installation on Concrete Ground with Feet 205
Figure 94 Cabinet Installation on Wooden Floor.................. 206
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
284 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Figure 95 Installation Base of Cabinet (Unit: mm) .............. 207
Figure 96 Cabinet Installation on Raised Floor with Fixed Base................................................................................... 208
Figure 97 Structure of 300 Base 160-260.......................... 209
Figure 98 Cabinet Installation on Raised Floor with Adjustable Base............................................................................. 212
Figure 99 Cabinet Installation in Top Fixing Mode............... 214
Figure 100 Cabinet Installation in Combined Cabinets Fixing Mode ............................................................................ 215
Figure 101 Cabinet Installation in Back-to-Back Fixing Mode 216
Figure 102 Installing Front Door (1) ................................. 218
Figure 103 Installing Front Door (2) ................................. 219
Figure 104 Installing Front Door (3) ................................. 220
Figure 105 Installing the Back Door (1) ............................ 221
Figure 106 Installing the Back Door (2) ............................ 222
Figure 107 Installing the Back Door (3) ............................ 223
Figure 108 Network Topology.......................................... 230
Figure 109 Local Upgrade Flowchart of ZXMP S200............. 239
Figure 110 Flowchart of Local Upgrade Preparations ........... 240
Figure 111 Interface for Local Upgrade of NCP Application ... 245
Figure 112 Remote Upgrade Flowchart of the ZXMP S200.... 248
Figure 113 Card Management Dialog Box of ZXMP S200...... 258
Figure 114 Appearance of the PMS-1A Optic Power Meter.... 261
Figure 115 Panel of the PMS-1A Optic Power Meter............. 262
Figure 116 Operation Flow of Measurement with the PMS-1A Optic Power Meter .......................................................... 263
Figure 117 Appearance of the ALL-11 Chip Burner.............. 265
Figure 118 Panel of the ALL-11 Chip Burner ...................... 266
Figure 119 Sectional View of 40-Pin Socket ....................... 266
Figure 120 Operation Flow of ALL-11 Chip Burner............... 267
Figure 121 Appearance of the YGBERT-2M BER Tester ........ 269
Figure 122 Panel of the YGBERT-2M BER Tester ................. 270
Figure 123 Operation Flow of the YGBERT-2M BER Tester.... 271
Figure 124 Appearance of Aglient OmniBer 718 SDH Tester. 272
Figure 125 Aglient OmniBer 718 Alarm Monitor Area .......... 272
Figure 126 Aglient OmniBer 718 Key Selection Area ........... 273
Figure 127 Aglient OmniBer 718 Test Display Window Area . 273
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 285
Tables
Table 1 Chapter and Appendix Summary ...............................i
Table 2 Typographical Conventions ...................................... ii
Table 3 Mouse Operation Conventions ................................. iii
Table 4 Safety Signs ..........................................................2
Table 5 Accessories Needed for Wall-Mounted Mode ............. 19
Table 6 Format of Contract Number in the Site Label ............ 30
Table 7 Fiber Pigtail Interface Numbering Format at Equipment Side ............................................................................... 32
Table 8 Fiber Pigtails Interface Numbering Format at ODF Side..................................................................................... 33
Table 9 Cable Interface Numbering Format at Equipment Side35
Table 10 Cable Interface Numbering Format at DDF Side ...... 35
Table 11 Power Port Numbering Format at ZTE Equipment Side..................................................................................... 37
Table 12 Power Interface Numbering Format at User Equipment Side ............................................................................... 37
Table 13 Specifications of External Cables ........................... 41
Table 14 Connection Relations of External Cables ................. 43
Table 15 Grounding Resistance Requirements in Independent Grounding Mode............................................................... 54
Table 16 Signal Definition and Color Code of -48 V/-60 V DC Power/Grounding Cable ..................................................... 56
Table 17 Signal Definition and Color Code of +24 V DC Power/Grounding Cable ..................................................... 57
Table 18 Signal Definitions and Connections of 75 Ω E1 Cable 60
Table 19 Signal Definitions and Color Codes of 120 Ω E1 Cable..................................................................................... 62
Table 20 Signal Definitions and Color Codes of T1 Cable........ 65
Table 21 Color Code Connection Relation of Crossover Network Cable.............................................................................. 67
Table 22 Color Code Connection Relation of Straight-through Cable.............................................................................. 68
Table 23 Color Code Connection Relation of RS232 Cable ...... 69
ZXMP S200 (V2.20) Installation & Maintenance Manual
286 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Table 24 Color Code Connection Relation of Alarm Output Cable..................................................................................... 70
Table 25 Color Code Connection Relation of Alarm Input Cable..................................................................................... 71
Table 26 Color Code Connection Relation of FE Data Cable .... 72
Table 27 Signal Definition and Color Code of V.35 Cable........ 74
Table 28 Color Code and Signal Definition of AI Data Cable ... 75
Table 29 Color Code and Signal Definition of OW Data Cable.. 77
Table 30 Color Code and Signal Definition of SHDSL Cable .... 79
Table 31 Common Optic Fiber Connectors ........................... 80
Table 32 Grounding Resistance Requirements in Independent Grounding Mode............................................................... 93
Table 33 Typical Power Supply Lightning Protection Classification ................................................................... 93
Table 34 Temperature and Humidity Requirements of the ZXMP S200 .............................................................................. 96
Table 35 Requirements for Concentration of Harmful Gas in Equipment Room.............................................................. 97
Table 36 Application Environment Requirements of the ZXMP S200 .............................................................................. 97
Table 37 Instruments and Meters Required for Equipment Maintenance .................................................................... 99
Table 38 Loopback Points and Corresponding Boards of the ZXMP S200.................................................................... 109
Table 39 Relations Among Insertion Point, Bit Error Type and Applicable Boards of the ZXMP S200 ................................. 115
Table 40 Relations Between Alarm Insertion Points and Applicable Boards ........................................................... 116
Table 41 Description of Indicator Status on the Main Board . 123
Table 42 Description of Indicator Status on the PWA/PWB Board................................................................................... 125
Table 43 Description of Indicator Status on PWC Board ....... 125
Table 44 Description of Indicator Status on the TFEx4 Board 126
Table 45 Description of Indicator Status on the TFEx4B Board................................................................................... 126
Table 46 Description of Indicator Status on the SEC Board .. 127
Table 47 Description of Indicator Status on the SDB Board .. 127
Table 48 Description of Indicator Status on the Other Boards128
Table 49 Relationship Between NE Icon Color and Alarm Severity ........................................................................ 133
Table 50 Alarms and Corresponding Severity Level............. 150
Tables
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 287
Table 51 Classification of Performance Information............. 153
Table 52 Dimensions and Weights of the ZTE Transmission Equipment Cabinets........................................................ 185
Table 53 Installation Accessories for ZTE Cabinet ............... 192
Table 54 Adjustable Base Types....................................... 209
Table 55 Relations between the Base Heights and the Rough-Adjustment Bolt Positions of the Adjustable Base with Height of 160 mm-260 mm ........................................................... 210
Table 56 Relations between the Base Heights and the Rough-Adjustment Bolt Positions of the Adjustable Base with Height of 260 mm-460 mm ........................................................... 210
Table 57 Meanings of Bytes in the NE IP Address ............... 227
Table 58 NE IP Address Allocation (FLSM) ......................... 227
Table 59 Area Definitions and NE IP Address Configurations. 231
Table 60 NE IP Address Configurations of the NEs Allocated into Area 193....................................................................... 231
Table 61 Definition of EMS Host Address ........................... 232
Table 62 Configuration Principle of EMS Host Address ......... 232
Table 63 Route Configuration Commands in Windows2000 .. 234
Table 64 Route Configuration Commands Lines in Unix ....... 234
Table 65 Route Configuration Commands in Configuration File (HP-UX) ........................................................................ 235
Table 66 Route Configuration Commands in Configuration Files (Solaris)........................................................................ 236
Table 67 NCP States and Corresponding DIP Switch Status.. 238
Table 68 Input Principles of NE Related Parameters ............ 242
Table 69 Parameters of the Command d-upgrade............... 244
Table 70 Parameters of the Command d-get-status (ZXMP S200)................................................................................... 246
Table 71 Fields that Need to be Verified for Local Upgrade... 246
Table 72 Fields in the Standby Area that Need to be Verified 251
Table 73 Parameters of the Command d-try (ZXMP S200) ... 252
Table 74 Descriptions of Fields in the Standby Area that Need to be Verified after the Try Run ............................................ 253
Table 75 Parameters of the Command d-active .................. 254
Table 76 Descriptions of Fields that Need to be Verified after Activation...................................................................... 255
Table 77 Specification of the PMS-1A Optic Power Meter ..... 262
top related